WO2018043294A1 - Recording medium production apparatus and recording medium production method - Google Patents

Recording medium production apparatus and recording medium production method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018043294A1
WO2018043294A1 PCT/JP2017/030387 JP2017030387W WO2018043294A1 WO 2018043294 A1 WO2018043294 A1 WO 2018043294A1 JP 2017030387 W JP2017030387 W JP 2017030387W WO 2018043294 A1 WO2018043294 A1 WO 2018043294A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
recording medium
fiber
containing material
ink receiving
receiving layer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/030387
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
田中　博
紘樹 倉田
関　俊一
依田　兼雄
市川　和弘
Original Assignee
セイコーエプソン株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2016166553A external-priority patent/JP2018034309A/en
Priority claimed from JP2016166552A external-priority patent/JP6844150B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2017150473A external-priority patent/JP2018034506A/en
Application filed by セイコーエプソン株式会社 filed Critical セイコーエプソン株式会社
Publication of WO2018043294A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018043294A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B23/00—Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose
    • B32B23/02—Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose in the form of fibres or filaments
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41M—PRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • B41M5/50—Recording sheets characterised by the coating used to improve ink, dye or pigment receptivity, e.g. for ink-jet or thermal dye transfer recording
    • B41M5/52—Macromolecular coatings
    • D—TEXTILES; PAPER
    • D21—PAPER-MAKING; PRODUCTION OF CELLULOSE
    • D21H—PULP COMPOSITIONS; PREPARATION THEREOF NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES D21C OR D21D; IMPREGNATING OR COATING OF PAPER; TREATMENT OF FINISHED PAPER NOT COVERED BY CLASS B31 OR SUBCLASS D21G; PAPER NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • D21H25/00—After-treatment of paper not provided for in groups D21H17/00 - D21H23/00
    • D21H25/18—After-treatment of paper not provided for in groups D21H17/00 - D21H23/00 of old paper as in books, documents, e.g. restoring

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses that paper is regenerated by polishing the image-formed surface of paper and applying a mixture of paper dust and glue generated by the polishing to the surface on which the image has been polished. A paper recycling method is described.
  • Patent Document 1 when a mixture of paper powder and glue is applied to the surface on which the image is polished, a spray is used.
  • the mixture can be formed on the surface by a single application. Even if it is desired to form a layer as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more), the layer thickness is considered to be only a few ⁇ m at most.
  • One of the objects according to some embodiments of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method capable of forming a recording layer with a uniform thickness as much as possible with a simple configuration. .
  • one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method capable of forming a recording layer as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more) with a simple configuration. There is.
  • one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium reproducing method capable of repeatedly reproducing the recording medium.
  • Another object of some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium reproducing apparatus capable of repeatedly reproducing a recording medium.
  • one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a recording medium that can be printed favorably, for example, by an ink jet method and can be reproduced thereafter.
  • Another object of some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus which can be printed favorably by, for example, an inkjet method and can be reproduced thereafter.
  • the present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes or application examples.
  • a recording medium manufacturing apparatus includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit that conveys a substrate, and the fiber-containing material.
  • a transfer portion that transfers the carrier-containing material to the base material, and in the transfer portion, the transport direction of the fiber-containing material by the support body is parallel to the transport direction of the base material by the transport portion ( (Same direction).
  • the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material with a uniform thickness.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus carries a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, and conveys a carrier at a first speed V1 and a substrate at a second speed V2. And a transfer unit that transfers the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the substrate.
  • the transfer direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier, and the transfer unit The transport direction of the base material is parallel (same) and satisfies the relationship of V1> V2.
  • the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • a recording medium manufacturing apparatus includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a carrier that conveys a base material, and the fiber-containing material.
  • a transfer portion that transfers the carrier-containing material to the base material, wherein the transfer portion transports the fiber-containing material in a direction opposite to the transport direction of the base material by the transport portion. It is characterized by being.
  • the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • a recording medium manufacturing apparatus includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit that conveys a substrate, and the fiber-containing material.
  • W2 weight of the fiber-containing material carried on the carrier
  • the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • the carrier is a rotating body. Thereby, the carrier can stably transfer the fiber-containing material to the substrate together with the transfer portion while rotating.
  • the rotating body has a dielectric layer on an outer peripheral portion.
  • the apparatus structure which transfers a fiber containing material can be simplified.
  • the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material by electrostatic force.
  • the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the base material by a simple method of using electrostatic force.
  • the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material while sandwiching the base material with the carrier.
  • the transfer unit separates the carrier on the base material to be larger than the thickness of the fiber-containing material layer transferred to the base material. It is preferable to transfer the fiber-containing material.
  • non-contact transfer can be performed, and for example, noise during transfer can be suppressed.
  • the fiber-containing material can be uniformly applied by, for example, electrostatic application.
  • the average length of the cellulose fibers is 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less.
  • the fiber-containing material can be uniformly applied by, for example, electrostatic application.
  • a recording medium manufacturing method conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material at a first speed V1, and conveys a substrate at a second speed V2.
  • the recording layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • a recording medium manufacturing method includes supporting a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a carrier, and transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to a substrate.
  • a transfer step wherein the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the carrier is W1, and the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate is W2. It satisfies the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0.
  • the recording layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • a recording medium reproduction method is a method of newly reproducing a recording medium from a recording medium having a recording surface on which information is recorded.
  • a first step of removing the information recording material provided for recording from the recording surface, and at least a part of the recording surface from which the information recording material has been removed include a fiber containing fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers.
  • a second step of forming a layer is a method of newly reproducing a recording medium from a recording medium having a recording surface on which information is recorded.
  • the recording medium in which information is recorded and is no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium in which the information is deleted and information can be recorded again.
  • this regeneration can be performed repeatedly, so that it is economical and environmentally friendly.
  • Application Example 19 In the recording medium reproducing method described in Application Example 18, in the first step, it is preferable that the information recording material is removed by at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding, and polishing. .
  • the information recording material can be removed by appropriately selecting from at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing, and therefore the information recording material can be easily and quickly removed.
  • Application Example 20 In the recording medium reproducing method according to Application Example 19, in the first step, at least one of a bite, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder is used as a removing member for removing the information recording material. It is preferable to use one.
  • the removal of the information recording material can be performed by appropriately selecting from at least one machining among cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing, and a tool suitable for the selected machining can be used. it can.
  • Application Example 21 In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 18 to 20, it is preferable that in the first step, the information recording material is removed while heating the information recording material. .
  • the information recording material is softened, so that the information recording material can be easily removed.
  • the fiber-containing layer is formed by electrostatic coating.
  • the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the recording surface on demand by a relatively simple method of electrostatic coating.
  • the recording medium reproducing method according to Application Example 22 preferably includes a step of forming a symbol including information on the fiber-containing layer. Thereby, the information regarding a fiber content layer can be checked (acquired) as needed.
  • the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers is preferably less than 3.
  • the fiber-containing material includes a hydrophobic material that covers at least a part of the cellulose fiber, and the hydrophobic material
  • the conductive material preferably contains a thermoplastic resin.
  • the fiber-containing layer has more stable charging characteristics (particularly negative chargeability). Moreover, it becomes possible to bind cellulose fibers by heat processing by including a thermoplastic resin.
  • content Wa when the content Wa is equal to or higher than the lower limit value, it is possible to secure the binding force of the cellulose fibers and to prevent the cellulose fibers from falling off the fiber-containing layer. If content Wa is less than the said upper limit, it can suppress that the hydrophobicity of a fiber content layer becomes high too much, for example, flips ink, and can improve printing quality.
  • the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is preferably 50 ° C. or more and 200 ° C. or less.
  • the glass transition temperature of a thermoplastic resin is more than the said lower limit, it can suppress that a fiber content layer peels off by heating of a friction grade, and can suppress that the intensity of a fiber content layer falls. Can do. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, for example, when the fiber-containing material to be the fiber-containing layer is fixed by heating and pressurizing, it is necessary to heat the recording medium to a temperature higher than the upper limit value. In addition, the cellulose fibers can be prevented from being damaged by heat.
  • the hydrophobic material preferably contains a charge control agent.
  • the fiber-containing material that becomes the fiber-containing layer can have stable chargeability and greater chargeability.
  • the hydrophobic material preferably contains a white pigment. Thereby, the whiteness of a fiber content layer can be adjusted suitably.
  • the average length of the cellulose fibers is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less.
  • the length of the cellulose fibers can be reduced by a dry method, and the cellulose fibers can be prevented from being entangled with each other.
  • the material can be uniformly electrostatically applied.
  • the fiber-containing layer is an ink receiving layer that receives ink.
  • ink ejected from an ink receiving layer for example, a print head of an ink jet printer, can be easily received and permeated. As a result, the ink receiving layer is printed.
  • a recording medium reproducing apparatus is an apparatus that newly reproduces a recording medium from a recording medium having a recording surface on which information is recorded, and is provided on the recording surface to record the information.
  • the recording medium in which information is recorded and is no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium in which the information is deleted and information can be recorded again.
  • this regeneration can be performed repeatedly, so that it is economical and environmentally friendly.
  • the material removing unit includes a removing member that removes the information recording material by rotating, and applies a tensile force to the recording medium. However, it is preferable to remove the information recording material with the removing member.
  • the information recording material of the recording medium can be easily removed.
  • the material removing unit rotates the information recording material by rotating with a transport unit that transports the recording medium having the recording surface.
  • a pair of first rollers that are disposed on the upstream side in the transport direction of the recording medium with respect to the removal member, and rotate while sandwiching the recording medium;
  • a pair of second rollers that are disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction with respect to the removing member and rotate while sandwiching the recording medium, and the speed of the pair of first rollers is Va, and the pair of first rollers
  • the clamping force of the roller is Fa
  • the speed of the pair of second rollers is Vb
  • the clamping force of the pair of second rollers is Fb
  • the speed of the removing member is Vc
  • the grinding force of the removing member is Fc
  • the recording medium when removing the information recording material on the recording surface, the recording medium can be pulled toward the downstream side in the transport direction, and thus the information recording material can be removed by one transport (one pass). It can be performed stably.
  • a recording medium manufacturing method includes a layer forming step of forming a recording layer made of a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate, and a surface of the recording layer. And a solidification step for solidifying the recording layer.
  • a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method.
  • a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary.
  • the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed.
  • the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
  • the recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 35 preferably includes a step of forming a symbol including information on the recording layer. Thereby, the information regarding a fiber content layer can be checked (acquired) as needed.
  • the recording layer is formed by electrostatic coating in the layer forming step.
  • the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the base material by a relatively simple method of electrostatic coating.
  • Application Example 38 In the recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 36 or 37, it is preferable that the recording layer is neutralized during the processing step or between the processing step and the solidification step. . Accordingly, when static electricity is applied to the recording layer, the static electricity can be discharged.
  • the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers is preferably less than 3. Thereby, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles, Therefore The fiber containing material used as a recording layer can be electrostatically apply
  • the treatment preferably includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer.
  • the surface of the recording layer can be made smooth, that is, the surface of the recording layer is flattened.
  • the treatment includes a semi-solidification process for semi-solidifying the surface of the recording layer.
  • the process includes a pressurizing process for pressurizing the recording layer.
  • the treatment includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer and a semi-solidification of the surface of the recording layer.
  • the processing step it is preferable to perform the processing in the order of the flattening processing and the semi-solidifying processing.
  • the treatment includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer, a pressurizing treatment for pressurizing the recording layer, and the recording layer.
  • the flattening process, the pressurizing process, and the semisolidifying process are preferably performed in this order.
  • Application Example 45 In the method for manufacturing a recording medium according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 44, it is preferable that the solidification step is performed by heating and pressurizing the recording layer. Thereby, the recording layer can be fixed to the substrate.
  • a recording medium manufacturing apparatus includes a recording layer forming unit that forms a recording layer made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a base material, and a surface of the recording layer. It is characterized by comprising a processing section for performing processing for adjusting properties and a solidifying section for solidifying the recording layer.
  • a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method.
  • a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary.
  • the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed.
  • the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
  • a recording medium reproduction method includes a removal step of removing the information recording material used for recording information from the base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material.
  • a layer forming step for forming the recording layer on the substrate includes a processing step for performing a process for adjusting the surface properties of the recording layer, and a solidifying step for solidifying the recording layer.
  • a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method.
  • a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary.
  • the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed.
  • the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
  • a recording medium reproducing apparatus includes a material removing unit that removes an information recording material used for recording information from a base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material.
  • a recording layer forming section for forming the recording layer on the substrate, a processing section for performing a process for adjusting the surface properties of the recording layer, and a solidifying section for solidifying the recording layer.
  • a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method.
  • a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary.
  • the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed.
  • the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the main part of the recording medium playback system of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram (flowchart) sequentially illustrating each step performed in the recording medium playback system shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an example of a recording medium manufactured by the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 6 is a view as seen from the direction of arrow B in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a region [C] surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG.
  • FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view sequentially illustrating the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view sequentially illustrating the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG.
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the seventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eighth embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the ninth embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the twelfth embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the main part of the recording medium playback system of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram (flowchart) sequentially illustrating each step performed in the recording medium playback system shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an example of a recording medium manufactured by the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 6 is a view as seen from the direction of arrow B in FIG. FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 8 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a region [C] surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG.
  • the xy plane including the x axis and the y axis is the horizontal direction
  • the z axis is the vertical direction.
  • a direction parallel to the x-axis is also referred to as “x-axis direction (first direction)”, a direction parallel to the y-axis is also referred to as “y-axis direction (second direction)”, and a direction parallel to the z-axis. Is also referred to as “z-axis direction (third direction)”.
  • the direction in which the arrow in each direction is directed is called “positive”, and the opposite direction is called “negative”.
  • the upper side may be referred to as “upper” or “upper”
  • the lower side may be referred to as “lower” or “lower”.
  • the left side may be referred to as “upstream side” and the right side may be referred to as “downstream side”.
  • the recording medium reproduction method is a method of newly reproducing the recording medium 90 from the recording medium 90 having the first surface 905 (recording surface) on which information is recorded, and is given to the first surface 905 (recording surface).
  • the first step of removing the information recording material used for recording information from the first surface 905 (recording surface), and at least a part of the first surface 905 (recording surface) from which the information recording material has been removed include cellulose.
  • the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A is an apparatus for newly reproducing the recording medium 90 from the recording medium 90 having the first surface 905 (recording surface) on which information is recorded, and the first surface 905 (recording surface).
  • the material removing unit 12 that removes the information recording material that is provided and used for recording information from the first surface 905 (recording surface), and at least a part of the recording surface from which the information recording material is removed include cellulose fibers.
  • This recording medium playback apparatus 1A is an apparatus that can execute a recording medium playback method.
  • the recording medium 90 'that has been recorded and no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium 90 on which the information is erased and information can be recorded again. Further, this reproduction can be repeated.
  • a recording medium manufacturing method includes a layer forming step of forming an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate 901, and an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). ) And a solidifying step for solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B includes an ink receiving layer forming unit 13 (recording layer forming) that forms an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate 901. Part), a surface property processing unit 14 (processing unit) that performs a process for adjusting the surface property of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), and an ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 (solidifying) that solidifies the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). Part).
  • This recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is an apparatus capable of executing a recording medium manufacturing method.
  • the recording medium reproduction method includes a removal step of removing an information recording material provided for information recording from a base material, and an ink receiving layer 902 composed of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material ( A recording layer) on the substrate 901, a processing step for adjusting the surface properties of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), a solidifying step for solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), Have.
  • the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A includes an ink receiving layer that includes a material removing unit 12 that removes an information recording material used for recording information from a base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material.
  • An ink receiving layer forming portion 13 (recording layer forming portion) for forming 902 (recording layer) on the substrate 901, and a surface property processing portion 14 (processing portion) for performing processing for adjusting the surface properties of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • an ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 solidifying unit that solidifies the ink receiving layer 902 processed by the surface texture processing unit 14 (processing unit).
  • a recording medium 90 as described later can be manufactured.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is favorably printed by, for example, an ink jet method.
  • the recording medium 90 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is printed may be unnecessary.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the printed recording medium 90 ', and then a new ink receiving layer 902 is formed.
  • the printed recording medium 90 ′ is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium 90 that can be printed again.
  • the recording medium 90 shown in FIG. 3 can be manufactured.
  • the recording medium 90 includes a sheet-like base material 901 and an ink receiving layer 902 formed on the base material 901.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 of the unused recording medium 90 can be printed and used.
  • various information is recorded in the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the various information includes, for example, characters, symbols, figures, patterns, colors, or combinations thereof.
  • a marking part (symbol) 904 described later can be recorded.
  • recording medium 90 ′ when the recording medium 90 that has been printed and used (hereinafter, this recording medium 90 is referred to as “recording medium 90 ′”) becomes unnecessary, the recording medium 90 ′ is re-used as waste paper. Used.
  • the recording medium reproduction system 100 can also be used for this reuse. In this case, the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the recording medium 90 ′ to obtain a base material 901. Then, by forming the ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 again, the used recording medium 90 is reproduced.
  • the recording medium 90 ′ is the recording medium 90 that has been used in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this.
  • the recording medium 90 ′ is printed directly on commercially available PPC (Plain Paper Copier) paper. It may have been used after being applied.
  • PPC paper can be obtained as the base material 901 by removing at least the printed portion from the PPC paper by the recording medium reproduction system 100. It should be noted that printing on the PPC paper may be performed in any manner such as ink or toner.
  • the used recording medium 90 (recording medium 90 ′) is referred to as a “primary recording medium”, and an unused recording medium 90 obtained from the primary recording medium is referred to as a “secondary recording medium”. Can be said.
  • the recording medium 90 includes a base material 901 and an ink receiving layer 902.
  • the base material 901 is, for example, PPC paper.
  • the base material 901 may be a recycled paper manufactured by defibrating waste paper, or may be an OHP sheet (trend spareness) used for an OHP (Over Head Projector).
  • the base material 901 is flexible as described above, but is not limited thereto, and may be a rigid body.
  • the shape of the base material 901 in plan view (the shape seen from the thickness direction of the base material 901) is a rectangle, but is not limited to this.
  • the size is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, A size or B size.
  • the base material 901 has a blank portion 903 where the ink receiving layer 902 is not provided at least at a part of the edge of the base material 901 in plan view.
  • the blank portion 903 is provided in a strip shape over the entire circumference of the edge portion of the base material 901.
  • the width of the blank portion 903 is, for example, preferably from 1 mm to 10 mm, and more preferably from 3 mm to 7 mm. If the width of the blank portion 903 is equal to or greater than the lower limit value, the ink receiving layer 902 can be easily removed from the blank portion 903. Further, if the width of the blank portion 903 is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the area of the ink receiving layer 902 on the base material 901 can be sufficiently ensured to be printable.
  • the blank part 903 is provided over the perimeter of the edge part of the base material 901, it is not limited to this, You may be provided in a part of edge part of the base material 901.
  • An ink receiving layer 902 is provided on the substrate 901.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is provided on one surface of the base material 901 (the upper first surface 905 in FIG. 4). It may also be provided on the side surface (lower second surface 906 in FIG. 4). Further, the shape of the ink receiving layer 902 in plan view is a rectangle, but is not limited thereto.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is a portion that is printed by an inkjet method (for example, by an inkjet printer), and is a composite (fiber-containing material) that includes cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material that covers at least part of the cellulose fibers. It is the fiber content layer comprised by these. Since such a fiber-containing layer is an ink receiving layer 902 that receives ink, the ink receiving layer 902 can easily receive and infiltrate ink ejected from the print head of the ink jet printer. As a result, the ink receiving layer 902 is printed. As described above, various kinds of information such as characters are recorded on the ink receiving layer 902 by printing.
  • the composite that is the constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 is a material that is used for storing information, and can also be referred to as an “information recording material”.
  • the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, preferably 20 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m, and more preferably 30 ⁇ m to 70 ⁇ m. If the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is equal to or greater than the lower limit, it is possible to suppress the ink ejected by the ink jet printer from penetrating to the base material 901 below the ink receiving layer 902. Further, if the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90 can be suppressed. For example, when the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is greater than 50 ⁇ m, it is possible to obtain a recording medium 90 that is more excellent in ink absorbability and retention in the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 includes (has) a marking portion (symbol) 904.
  • the marking unit 904 includes information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer). Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 3, one marking portion 904 is provided in the vicinity of one corner of the ink receiving layer 902 that is rectangular in plan view, but the arrangement location and the number of arrangement are not limited to this.
  • the marking unit 904 may be a barcode (one-dimensional barcode), but is preferably a QR code (registered trademark) (two-dimensional code) (“QR code” is a registered trademark).
  • QR code registered trademark
  • the marking unit 904 can carry a relatively large amount of information.
  • the marking unit 904 may be, for example, a simple figure, symbol, character, or a combination of these in addition to the barcode or QR code.
  • the information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following information. Position information of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the first surface 905. Area information of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the first surface 905. Ink receiving layer 902 thickness information. Information on the composition of the composite that forms the ink receiving layer 902 (for example, the ratio of cellulose fiber to resin).
  • the ink receiving layer 902 when the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the substrate 901 as described above, the ink receiving layer 902 thickness information and the margin portion 903 position and width information are acquired from the marking unit 904 to obtain ink.
  • the receiving layer 902 can be easily removed.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is printed by an ink jet printer, information on the composition of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 is acquired from the marking unit 904, so that the image of the ink receiving layer 902 can be obtained. Is suitable for printing (for example, whether it is suitable for printing a photograph or printing a character).
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is composed of a composite (fiber-containing material) including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material covering at least a part of the cellulose fibers. As will be described later, the ink receiving layer 902 is formed by adhering the composite to the base material 901 by electrostatic coating (coating using electrostatic force) by a method similar to the electrophotographic method, and pressurizing and heating. Is done.
  • Cellulose fibers are fibers composed of cellulose.
  • the cellulose fiber may be a natural fiber, a regenerated fiber, or a semi-synthetic fiber.
  • the cellulose fiber may be derived from virgin pulp, may be derived from a cellulose product such as paper (including waste paper, recycled paper, etc.), or cellulose as described above.
  • Semi-synthetic fibers obtained by subjecting a material containing to chemical treatment may also be used.
  • the cellulose fibers may be powder fibers.
  • the cellulose fiber is not particularly limited as long as it is mainly composed of cellulose (narrowly defined cellulose) as a compound and has a fibrous form, and includes hemicellulose and lignin in addition to cellulose (narrowly defined cellulose). It may be.
  • the size of the cellulose fibers contained in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably, for example, an average (number average) length (major axis) of 1 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m and a width (minor axis) of 1 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m. More preferably, the thickness is 5 ⁇ m or more and 30 ⁇ m or less, and the width is 5 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less.
  • the length of the cellulose fiber is made smaller than the lower limit value, the production cost of the cellulose fiber becomes high. However, the production cost can be suppressed within the above range. Furthermore, if the magnitude
  • the length of a cellulose fiber is below the said upper limit, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles. Thereby, the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901.
  • size (length, width) of a cellulose fiber is measured using the particle
  • This apparatus is an apparatus for measuring particle size and particle shape by uniformly dispersing a sample by an automatic dry dispersion unit and analyzing a still image of the sample.
  • the fiber-containing material constituting the ink receiving layer 902 includes a hydrophobic material, and the hydrophobic material covers at least a part of the cellulose fiber.
  • the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers contained in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably less than 3, and more preferably 2 or less. If the average aspect-ratio of a cellulose fiber is less than 3, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles. Thereby, the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 can be made more suitable for the ink to permeate during printing. In this way, in particular, the ink absorbability of the ink receiving layer 902 can be increased.
  • the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fiber is, for example, a value obtained by dividing the average length of the cellulose fiber measured by the particle image analyzer Morphogi G3 by the average width.
  • the average length of a cellulose fiber is 1 micrometer or more and 100 micrometers or less.
  • the length of a cellulose fiber can be made small by a dry system, and it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles.
  • the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901.
  • the hydrophobic material is fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment, for example, to form a composite.
  • the hydrophobic material may cover a part of the surface of the cellulose fiber or may cover the entire surface of the cellulose fiber.
  • the hydrophobic material should just be a thing with hydrophobicity higher than a cellulose as a whole, for example, may contain the component (hydrophilic component with a low hydrophobicity) rather than a cellulose.
  • the hydrophobic material binds cellulose fibers together to form a porous ink receiving layer 902. Also, by having hydrophobicity, the balance between hydrophobicity and hydrophilicity of the ink receiving layer 902 can be adjusted, and excessive wetting and spreading of the ink when ink is applied to the ink receiving layer 902 is suppressed. In addition, the ink absorbability in the ink receiving layer 902 can be made excellent. Furthermore, the hydrophobic material can make the charging property of the composite excellent in stability by coating the cellulose fiber. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be suitably formed by electrostatic coating.
  • cellulose fibers that are not coated with a hydrophobic material have high affinity with ink, and the ink may ooze.
  • the chargeability of the cellulose fiber can be stabilized, and ink bleeding can be suppressed.
  • the hydrophobic material contains at least a resin.
  • the resin binds cellulose fibers together to form a porous ink receiving layer 902.
  • the resin may be in powder form.
  • the content of the resin in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 10% by mass or more and less than 40% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less.
  • the hydrophobic material has a function of binding cellulose fibers together, and also has a function of stabilizing the charging characteristics of the composite by covering the cellulose fibers.
  • the hydrophobic material is generally composed of a resin as described later. This resin may be positively charged or negatively charged, but is preferably negatively charged. In general, negatively chargeable resins are particularly excellent in stability of charging characteristics. In addition to the positively chargeable resin, there are many types of negatively chargeable resins, and the characteristics of the resin (for example, melting point, glass transition temperature, bonding strength with cellulose fiber, charge amount, degree of hydrophobicity, etc.) ) Can be easily adjusted, and is advantageous from the viewpoint of reducing the manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90.
  • the resin constituting the hydrophobic material for example, a thermoplastic resin, a curable resin, or the like can be used, but it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin.
  • a thermoplastic resin generally more stable charging characteristics (particularly negative chargeability) can be obtained.
  • the hydrophobic material contains a curable resin, the heat resistance and durability of the recording medium 90 can be made particularly excellent.
  • the hydrophobic material may include a thermoplastic resin and a curable resin in addition to the thermoplastic resin alone.
  • thermoplastic resin examples include AS resin, ABS resin, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyolefin such as ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), modified polyolefin, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, and polyethylene.
  • EVA ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
  • acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, and polyethylene.
  • Polyester such as terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, nylon 6, nylon 46, nylon 66, nylon 610, nylon 612, nylon 11, nylon 12, nylon 6-12, nylon 6-66, polyamide (nylon), polyphenylene ether, polyacetal , Polyether, polyphenylene oxide, polyether ether ketone, polycarbonate, polyphenylene sulfide, thermoplastic polyimide, polyetherimide, aromatic Liquid crystal polymers such as reesters, various thermoplastic elastomers such as styrene, polyolefin, polyvinyl chloride, polyurethane, polyester, polyamide, polybutadiene, trans polyisoprene, fluororubber, chlorinated polyethylene, etc. 1 type selected from these, or 2 or more types can be used in combination.
  • the thermoplastic resin polyester or one containing the same is used as the thermoplastic resin.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the thermoplastic resin is preferably, for example, 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 55 ° C. or higher and 160 ° C. or lower. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or higher than the lower limit, it is possible to suppress the ink receiving layer 902 from being peeled off by heating to the extent of friction, and to suppress the strength of the ink receiving layer 902 from being lowered. it can. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, for example, when the composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902 is heated and pressed to be fixed, the recording medium 90 needs to be heated to a temperature higher than the upper limit value.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 can be softened by heating, and at that time, it is not necessary to heat the recording medium 90 to a temperature higher than the upper limit value. .
  • the curable resin examples include a thermosetting resin, a photocurable resin, and the like. More specifically, a phenol resin, an epoxy resin, a melamine resin, a urea resin, an unsaturated polyester resin, an alkyd resin, and a urethane resin. (Polyurethane), an acrylic resin, etc. are mentioned, It can use combining 1 type (s) or 2 or more types selected from these.
  • Wa is preferably 10% by mass or more and less than 40% by mass, and 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass. The following is more preferable. If content Wa is more than the said lower limit, the binding force of a cellulose fiber can be ensured and it can suppress that a cellulose fiber falls from the ink receiving layer 902. If the content Wa is less than the above upper limit value, it is possible to suppress the ink receiving layer 902 from becoming too hydrophobic and repel the ink, and the print quality can be improved. Whether the composite is attached to the base material 901 or the composite is attached to the base material 901 to form the ink receiving layer 902, the content Wa is the above numerical value. It is preferable to be within the range.
  • the hydrophobic material may contain a charge control agent (charge control agent).
  • charge control agent charge control agent
  • the composite used as the ink receiving layer 902 can have stable chargeability and greater chargeability. Whether or not the composite contains a charge control agent can be confirmed not only by a change in the charge amount of the composite but also by a decrease in the angle of repose of the composite.
  • the charge control agent may have a function as an aggregation inhibitor that suppresses aggregation of the complex.
  • at least a part of the charge control agent is usually exposed on the surface of the resin. Thereby, the effect by including a charge control agent is exhibited more effectively.
  • Examples of the charge control agent include silica (silicon dioxide), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, cerium oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, calcium carbonate, metal salt of benzoic acid, and salicylic acid.
  • One or two or more selected from can be used in combination.
  • the charge control agent may be subjected to surface treatment for the purpose of adjusting charging characteristics, adjusting hydrophobicity, and the like.
  • a silane compound can be used for the surface treatment of the charge control agent.
  • a hydrophobic treatment can be suitably performed on the charge control agent.
  • the silane compound used for the hydrophobic treatment of the charge control agent include alkylsilanes such as trimethylsilane, dimethylsilane, triethylsilane, triisopropylsilane, and triisobutylsilane, and silanes such as vinyltrimethoxysilane and vinyltriethoxysilane.
  • a coupling agent etc. are mentioned.
  • the form of the charge control agent is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the form of particles (fine particles).
  • the volume-based average particle diameter (volume average particle diameter) of the charge control agent is, for example, preferably from 1 nm to 100 nm, and more preferably from 5 nm to 50 nm. If the particle size of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, a better charging effect can be obtained. Furthermore, when the particle size of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, coating can be performed more favorably on the resin surface.
  • the volume average particle diameter of the charge control agent can be determined by, for example, a laser diffraction / scattering method or a dynamic light scattering method.
  • the content of the charge control agent is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, and preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose fiber and resin mixture. Is more preferable. If the range of the content of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, the composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902 can exhibit better and more stable chargeability.
  • the hydrophobic material may contain a white pigment.
  • the whiteness of the ink receiving layer 902 can be adjusted suitably.
  • the white pigment can form the ink receiving layer 902 with high whiteness even when the low-whiteness base material 901 or cellulose fibers with low whiteness is used, and the appearance of printing ( Quality).
  • the white pigment material examples include inorganic pigments such as calcium carbonate, titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, lithopone, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, antimony trioxide, titanium phosphate, zinc oxide, white lead, zirconium oxide, polystyrene, styrene- Examples thereof include organic fine powders such as divinylbenzene copolymer, and one or two or more selected from these can be used in combination.
  • inorganic pigments such as calcium carbonate, titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, lithopone, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, antimony trioxide, titanium phosphate, zinc oxide, white lead, zirconium oxide, polystyrene, styrene-
  • organic fine powders such as divinylbenzene copolymer, and one or two or more selected from these can be used in combination.
  • titanium dioxide or calcium carbonate is used as the white pigment.
  • the blending amount of the white pigment is, for example, preferably from 1 part by mass to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably from 3 parts by mass to 20 parts by mass with respect to 90 parts by mass of the resin. Thereby, it is possible to more suitably increase the whiteness of the ink receiving layer 902 while suppressing an increase in manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90.
  • the white pigment may be arranged either on the surface or inside of the resin.
  • polyester when 90 parts by weight of polyester is mixed with 10 parts by weight of calcium carbonate, which is a white pigment, in a hopper and then charged into a twin-screw kneading extruder and melt-kneaded to produce white resin pellets.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 formed from resin pellets has higher whiteness.
  • the hydrophobic material may include components other than those described above.
  • the hydrophobic material may include pigments and dyes other than white pigments.
  • colored paper can be easily obtained at low cost by electrostatic coating.
  • the absolute value of the average charge amount of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 3 ⁇ C / g or more.
  • the composite can be easily attached to the substrate 901 by electrostatic coating, and the ink receiving layer 902 can be formed.
  • the charge amount of the composite can be measured by friction charging the composites.
  • the charge amount can be measured, for example, by stirring (mixing) a powder called a standard carrier and a composite in the air and measuring the charge amount of the powder.
  • the average charge amount of the composite can be determined, for example, as follows. The mixed powder of 80% by mass of the carrier and 20% by mass of the composite is put into an acrylic container, and the container is placed on a ball mill frame at 100 rpm for 60 seconds, and the container is rotated. Body). The absolute value of the average charge amount can be obtained by measuring the mixed composite and carrier mixture with a suction-type small charge amount measuring device (for example, “Model 210Hs-2” manufactured by Trek).
  • a suction-type small charge amount measuring device for example, “Model 210Hs-2” manufactured by Trek.
  • a powder composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 ⁇ m and an average width (minor axis) of 9 ⁇ m and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000) and having a particle diameter of 1 ⁇ m to 40 ⁇ m.
  • the body was mixed in air at a ratio of 2: 8 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment to form a composite.
  • silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed.
  • cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles.
  • the average charge amount is ⁇ 6 ⁇ C / g.
  • the recording medium reproduction system 100 includes the recording medium reproduction apparatus 1A, the control unit 11, and the marking unit forming unit 20 (see FIG. 1). Further, the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A includes a material removing unit 12 and a recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B.
  • Step S101 is a material removal step (removal step) for removing the ink receiving layer 902 (the material constituting the ink receiving layer 902) from the recording medium 90 'to obtain the substrate 901.
  • Step S102 is a layer forming step for forming an unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 obtained in step S101.
  • Step S103 is a processing step of performing a surface texture normalization process (hereinafter, this process is simply referred to as “surface texture process”) for adjusting the surface texture of the unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 formed on the substrate 901.
  • Step S104 is a solidification step for solidifying the unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 that has been subjected to the surface texture treatment. Note that in the recording medium reproduction system 100, step S101 is referred to as “first step”, and the subsequent step S102 to step S104, that is, the ink receiving layer 902 that can be printed on the substrate 901 is formed. This is called the “second step”.
  • the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A is an apparatus that newly reproduces the recording medium 90 from the used recording medium 90 '.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is an apparatus mainly responsible for the re-formation of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the substrate 901 from which the ink receiving layer 902 has been removed by the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A.
  • the control unit 11 is a control device that controls the operation of each unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A and the marking unit forming unit 20.
  • the control unit 11 includes a CPU (central processing unit) 111 and a storage unit 112.
  • the storage unit 112 stores a control program for controlling the operation, various data, and the like.
  • the recording medium reproduction system 100 can execute step S101 to step S104 in order based on these control programs and the like.
  • control unit 11 preferably includes an input unit such as a keyboard and a touch panel, and an image display unit such as an LCD monitor.
  • the operating conditions of each part to be described later may be input in advance to the control program, or may be input each time via the input part. This input information can also be confirmed via the image display unit.
  • the control unit 11 may be provided with a connection unit to which an input unit and an image display unit are connected.
  • the recording medium playback apparatus 1 ⁇ / b> A includes a material removing unit 12.
  • the material removing unit 12 executes Step S101.
  • step S101 removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is performed by at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding, and polishing. Is preferred.
  • step S101 at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material).
  • the fiber-containing material is removed by cutting, and the cutting tool 122 is used for the cutting.
  • a tool suitable for cutting can be used, and therefore the cutting can be performed easily and quickly.
  • the material removing unit 12 includes a rotating drum 121, a cutting tool 122, and a pump 123.
  • the rotating drum 121 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow ⁇ 121 (clockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a driving source.
  • the rotating drum 121 is formed of a cylindrical body, and its inner cavity 121a is airtightly connected to the pump 123.
  • a plurality of suction holes 121b each having a through hole communicating with the inner cavity 121a are formed in the wall portion of the rotary drum 121. These suction holes 121b are arranged at equal intervals along the circumferential direction of the rotary drum 121, and are also arranged at intervals even along the y-axis direction. Then, by operating the pump 123, a suction force F121 is generated in each suction hole 121b. With this suction force F121, the recording medium 90 'can be fixed to the outer peripheral portion of the rotary drum 121.
  • the rotating drum 121 is configured to fix the recording medium 90 ′ by the suction force F121, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to fix the recording medium 90 ′ by electrostatic force, for example.
  • Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which a dielectric or an electrode is disposed on the outer surface of the rotating drum 121.
  • the cutting tool 122 is a tool used for cutting.
  • the cutting tool 122 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotating drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 121.
  • cutting of the ink receiving layer 902 from the blank portion 903 of the recording medium 90 ′ is performed by causing the cutting tool 122 to approach the rotating drum 121 while the rotating drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated. Can start. Then, by continuing this cutting, the ink receiving layer 902 can be peeled from the substrate 901. Thereby, for example, when confidential information is recorded in the ink receiving layer 902, the confidential information can be deleted on the spot.
  • the base material 901 from which the ink receiving layer 902 has been peeled is removed from the rotating drum 121 after the rotation of the rotating drum 121 is stopped, and is collected in the tray 17 (see FIG. 7). This collection may be performed automatically or manually.
  • the peeled ink receiving layer 902 is preferably collected separately.
  • the blank portion 903 of the recording medium 90 ′ on the rotating drum 121 and the cutting tool are rotated while the rotating drum 121 rotates.
  • the blade edge 122 is positioned.
  • This positioning operation is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 may be peeled off while the rotating drum 121 rotates once, or may be performed while the rotating drum 121 rotates a plurality of times.
  • the cutting is performed while gradually moving the cutting tool 122 closer to the rotating drum 121. Accordingly, even if the ink receiving layer 902 is relatively thick, it can be peeled off without difficulty.
  • a stopper for restricting the maximum approach distance between the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 121 is provided.
  • the removal limit by the cutting tool 122 is restricted, that is, the distance between the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 121 can be prevented from becoming smaller than the thickness of the base material 901, for example. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 from entering the base material 901 and excessive cutting.
  • the cutting speed of the cutting tool 122 can be adjusted by changing the rotational speed of the motor that rotates the rotating drum 121.
  • the rotation speed of the motor can be changed by changing the voltage applied to the motor.
  • the rotation of the rotary drum 121, the movement of the cutting tool 122, the operation of the pump 123, and the like are controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the material removing unit 12 has three cutting tools 122. These cutting tools 122 are arranged along the y-axis direction and are connected to each other via a connecting portion 124. When cutting and removing the ink receiving layer 902, these cutting tools 122 are moved together in the arrow ⁇ 122 direction (y-axis direction) together with the connecting portion 124. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed quickly. Further, the reciprocating distance of the cutting tool 122, that is, the deflection width in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 122, can be adjusted according to the width of the ink receiving layer 902 in the y-axis direction.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1 ⁇ / b> B includes a transport unit 16 and an ink receiving layer forming unit 13. As shown in FIG. 8, the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1 ⁇ / b> B further includes a surface property processing unit (processing unit) 14 and an ink receiving layer solidifying unit (solidifying unit) 15 in addition to these.
  • processing unit processing unit
  • solidifying unit solidifying unit
  • the transport unit 16 transports the base material 901 before the ink receiving layer 902 is formed or the base material 901 (recording medium 90) on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed.
  • the transport unit 16 includes a transport belt 161 and a transport roller 162.
  • the conveyance belt 161 is constituted by, for example, an endless belt, and can convey toward the positive side in the x-axis direction while the base material 901 is placed.
  • metal materials such as stainless steel, for example.
  • a heat-resistant resin material such as polyimide can be used.
  • the transport belt 161 may transport the base material 901 while it is simply placed, or the surface of the transport belt 161 has adhesiveness, and the base material 901 is held and transported by this adhesive. It may be a thing.
  • the substrate 901 may be conveyed (platen) configured to adsorb and hold the substrate 901 with a negative pressure, for example.
  • the base material 901 before the ink receiving layer 902 is formed is supplied from the tray 17 to the transport belt 161. This supply may be performed automatically or manually. Moreover, it is preferable to supply the base material 901 to the conveyance belt 161 one by one (each leaf). Further, the base material 901 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed is separately collected from the transport belt 161 on the downstream side in the transport direction. This collection may also be performed automatically or manually.
  • the conveying belt 161 preferably has sufficient strength to withstand the conveyance of the base material 901 and has sufficient flexibility to function as an endless belt. In particular, it is preferable that the conveyance belt 161 can sufficiently hold the potential difference between the photosensitive member 131 and the transfer unit 134 when passing through a transfer nip 135 described later.
  • the transport rollers 162 are arranged such that two transport rollers 162 are paired up and down via the transport belt 161 and are spaced along the direction in which the transport belt 161 extends. And each base roller 901 mounted on the conveyance belt 161 can be conveyed because each conveyance roller 162 rotates to the direction of arrow (alpha) 162, respectively.
  • the conveyance part 16 is comprised so that change of the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is possible.
  • This changing method is not particularly limited. For example, a method of adjusting a voltage applied to a motor connected to the conveyance roller 162 serving as a main driving roller, a speed reducer is provided between the main driving roller and the motor. Methods and the like.
  • the main driving roller is preferably a conveyance roller 162 positioned below the conveyance belt 161 rather than the conveyance roller 162 positioned above the conveyance belt 161.
  • the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 is arranged in the middle of the transport direction of the base material 901.
  • the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 executes Step S102, that is, executes a layer forming step of forming the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) on the substrate 901 with the fiber-containing material (composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902).
  • the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 includes a photosensitive member 131, a charging unit 132, an exposure unit 133, a transfer unit 134, and a material supply unit 2.
  • the ink receiving layer is formed on the substrate 901 by electrostatic coating. This is an apparatus for forming 902.
  • the photosensitive member 131 is a carrier that is disposed on the upper side of the conveyance belt 161 and carries a fiber-containing material on its outer peripheral surface 131a and transfers the fiber-containing material to the substrate 901.
  • the photosensitive member 131 as such a carrier is a rotating member, that is, a cylindrical member.
  • the photoconductor 131 is connected to a motor and can rotate in the direction of arrow ⁇ 131 (counterclockwise). Thereby, the photoconductor 131 can stably transfer the fiber-containing material to the base material 901 while rotating in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 131 as the base material 901 is conveyed.
  • the photosensitive member 131 is configured to be able to change its rotation speed.
  • the changing method is not particularly limited, and for example, it is possible to change the voltage applied to the motor connected to the photoconductor 131.
  • the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoconductor 131 is preferably formed of, for example, an organic photoconductor.
  • the rotation of the photosensitive member 131 is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • a charging unit 132, an exposure unit 133, a material supply unit 2, and a transfer unit 134 are arranged in this order along the arrow ⁇ 131 of the photoconductor 131 on the outer peripheral side of the photoconductor 131.
  • the charging unit 132 is a roller that uniformly charges the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131 while rotating in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 132 (clockwise) as the photosensitive member 131 rotates.
  • the charging unit 132 can charge the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131 to, for example, a negative potential.
  • the charging unit 132 can be configured by, for example, a corona charger that irradiates ozone, a charging brush, a charging film, or the like. The operation of the charging unit 132 is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the exposure unit 133 exposes the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131 and adjusts the potential of the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131.
  • the exposure unit 133 can adjust the potential so that the fiber-containing material moves and adheres to the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photoconductor 131 by irradiating the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photoconductor 131 with the laser beam LB133.
  • the potential can be adjusted, for example, by gradually charging a part of the outer peripheral surface 131a of the uniformly charged photoreceptor 131.
  • the operation of the exposure unit 133 is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the material supply unit 2 moves and attaches the fiber-containing material to the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131.
  • the material supply unit 2 includes a storage unit 21, an agitator 22, a supply roller 23, a layer forming roller 24, and a blade 25. The operation of the material supply unit 2 is also controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the storage unit 21 stores a powdery fiber-containing material therein.
  • the stirrer 22 can rotate in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 22 (counterclockwise) in the storage unit 21. Thereby, the fiber-containing material can be stirred and charged in the storage unit 21.
  • the fiber-containing material is supplied to the layer forming roller 24 via the supply roller 23 that rotates in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 23 (clockwise).
  • the layer forming roller 24 has a potential difference with the fiber-containing material supplied via the supply roller 23, and the fiber-containing material is electrostatically attached while rotating in the direction of arrow ⁇ 24 (clockwise).
  • the blade 25 adjusts the thickness (attachment amount) of the fiber-containing material attached on the layer forming roller 24 to form a thin film, which is triboelectrically charged.
  • the fiber-containing material on the layer forming roller 24 moves and adheres to the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photosensitive member 131 due to a potential difference between the photosensitive member 131 and the layer forming roller 24.
  • the potential between the photosensitive member 131 and the layer forming roller 24 is appropriately set. The setting of the potential is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the transfer unit 134 is disposed on the opposite side (lower side in FIG. 7) of the photosensitive member 131 with respect to the conveying belt 161, and can sandwich the substrate 901 together with the conveying belt 161 with the photosensitive member 131. As a result, the fiber-containing material attached to the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131 can be transferred to the substrate 901.
  • the transfer unit 134 is an idle roller that rotates in the direction of arrow ⁇ 134 (clockwise), and forms a transfer nip 135 that is a space with the photoreceptor 131.
  • the outer peripheral surface 134a of the transfer unit 134 has a predetermined potential.
  • the transfer nip 135 a potential difference is generated between the photoconductor 131 and the transfer portion 134, so that the fiber-containing material on the photoconductor 131 is electrostatically moved to the transfer portion 134 side, and the base material 901. Is transferred to. Then, the transferred fiber-containing material is formed into a layer shape with the movement of the base material 901 and becomes the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the transfer unit 134 functions as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16.
  • the transfer unit 134 transfers the fiber-containing material by the electrostatic force generated by the potential difference with the photoreceptor 131. That is, in the second step (layer forming step), the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer (recording layer)) is formed by electrostatic coating.
  • the fiber-containing material can be easily and appropriately attached to the base material 901 by a simple method using electrostatic force (electrostatic application).
  • the transfer unit 134 is configured to transfer the fiber-containing material by sandwiching the substrate 901 together with the conveyance belt 161 with the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member). Thereby, application
  • the transfer unit 134 transfer nip 135), the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photoreceptor 131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are the same.
  • the surface property processing unit 14 is disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the ink receiving layer forming unit 13, that is, on the positive side in the x-axis direction.
  • the surface texture processing unit 14 executes Step S103.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 immediately after being formed by the ink receiving layer forming portion 13 is in a state in which various types of unevenness such as unevenness in the stripes, undulations, etc. (hereinafter “represented by unevenness in the stripes”) are generated.
  • Such a state depends on the degree, but for example, the ink reception in the ink receiving layer 902 may be somewhat inhibited. Therefore, it is necessary to perform a process for adjusting the surface texture on the ink receiving layer 902 where the unevenness has occurred, and the surface texture process is performed by the surface texture processing unit 14.
  • a leveling treatment for leveling the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 a pressure treatment for pressing the ink receiving layer 902, and a semi-solidification for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902. Processing.
  • the cause of unevenness in the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, due to an assembly error between components constituting the ink receiving layer forming portion 13 (for example, an error in the driving gear pitch during layer formation or transfer), or during transfer. And the like due to the ink receiving layer 902 being broken by the transfer vibration after transfer.
  • the surface texture treatment unit 14 includes a leveling treatment unit 3, a pressure treatment unit 4, and a semi-solidification treatment unit 5. Further, the leveling processing unit 3, the pressure processing unit 4, and the semi-solidification processing unit 5 are arranged in this order along the conveyance direction of the base material 901.
  • the surface texture treatment includes a smoothing treatment (flattening treatment) that smoothes and flattens the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • a smoothing treatment flattening treatment
  • the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 can be made smooth.
  • the leveling processing is performed in the leveling processing unit 3.
  • the leveling unit 3 includes a leveling roller 31 and a support roller 32.
  • the leveling roller 31 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyor belt 161.
  • the leveling roller 31 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 31 (counterclockwise) around the y axis by a motor (not shown) as a driving source. Further, the leveling roller 31 can contact the surface 902 a of the ink receiving layer 902. As shown in FIG. 9, the leveling roller 31 is adjusted to rotate so as to satisfy the relationship of V31 ⁇ V16, where V31 is the tangential speed at the contact point with the surface 902a.
  • the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 moves to the positive side in the x-axis direction, minute irregularities and the like that form streaks are crushed and the fiber-containing material is pushed back upstream in the transport direction CD16. .
  • the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 is smoothed (flattened), with undulations, irregularities and the like being reduced.
  • the base material 901 is prevented from being displaced with respect to the transport belt 161 by, for example, the above-described adhesion or other frictional engagement. Further, the material pushed back from the ink receiving layer 902 may be separately collected and discarded, or may be reused. Further, the rotation of the leveling roller 31 is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the leveling roller 31 is made of a metal material such as stainless steel.
  • the surface roughness (centerline average roughness Ra) of the outer peripheral surface of the leveling roller 31 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less, for example.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is charged with static electricity generated by friction with the leveling roller 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8, the leveling roller 31 is grounded via the ground wire 33. As a result, the leveling roller 31 can be neutralized, and therefore the fiber-containing material powder constituting the ink receiving layer 902 can be prevented from adhering to the leveling roller 31.
  • the surface texture processing unit 14 can perform static elimination on the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) during step S103 (processing step).
  • the neutralization of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) is not limited to being performed during step S103 (processing step), but is performed between step S103 (processing step) and step S104 (solidification step). Also good.
  • the support roller 32 is disposed on the side opposite to the leveling roller 31 with respect to the transport belt 161.
  • This support roller 32 is an idle roller that rotates in the direction of arrow ⁇ 32 (clockwise) around the y-axis.
  • the support roller 32 can support the substrate 901 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed from the lower side together with the transport belt 161, and thus leveling processing (flattening processing) on the surface 902 a of the ink receiving layer 902. Can be performed sufficiently.
  • the support roller 32 has a function as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16.
  • the surface texture treatment is performed by adding a leveling treatment (flattening treatment) for leveling and flattening the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) and an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). Pressurizing treatment for pressing, and semi-solidifying treatment for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • step S103 surface property processing (processing) is performed in the order of leveling processing (flattening processing), pressurizing processing, and semi-solidifying processing.
  • a pressurizing process in the middle of step S103, it is possible to suitably increase the density of the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the pressurizing process is performed by the pressurizing unit 4.
  • the pressure processing unit 4 is a calendar machine having two pressure rollers 41 whose outer peripheral part 411 is made of a metal material such as stainless steel. These two pressure rollers 41 are arranged above and below the conveyor belt 161, and are idle rollers that rotate in the direction of arrow ⁇ 41.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two pressure rollers 41, the ink receiving layer 902 can be pressed in a direction in which the layer thickness decreases. As a result, pressure treatment is performed, and thus the fiber-containing materials are bonded to each other in the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the density of the fiber-containing material is increased and the density is also made uniform.
  • the force with which the two pressure rollers 41 press the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, a strong pressure of preferably 10 kg or more and 2000 kg or less, more preferably 400 kg or more and 800 kg or less.
  • pressurization with respect to the ink receiving layer 902 is once in this embodiment, it is not limited to this, For example, you may perform in steps over multiple times.
  • the lower pressure roller 41 of the two pressure rollers 41 has a function as a conveyance roller that moves the conveyance belt 161 together with the conveyance roller 162 of the conveyance unit 16. Further, the two pressure rollers 41 may be configured such that the distance between the centers is variable. Thereby, a pressurizing force can be adjusted. This adjustment is also controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the surface property treatment includes leveling treatment (flattening treatment) for leveling and flattening the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), and pressurization for pressurizing the ink receiving layer 902. And a semi-solidification process for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • leveling treatment flattening treatment
  • pressurizing pressurizing the ink receiving layer 902.
  • a semi-solidification process for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
  • the semi-solidification process is performed at the end of step S103, and contributes to prevention of scattering of the fiber-containing material, which is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902, and the shape maintenance of the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the semi-solidification process can also be referred to as a process of temporarily solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 prior to the main solidification in the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15. By this temporary solidification, the solidification of the ink receiving layer 902 can be promoted.
  • the semi-solidification processing is performed in the semi-solidification processing unit 5.
  • the semi-solidification processing unit 5 includes a chamber 51 and a heater 52.
  • the chamber 51 has a heat insulating wall 511 made of a heat insulating material.
  • the chamber 51 has an inlet 512 and an outlet 513. Thereby, the base material 901 on the transport belt 161 can pass through the chamber 51 together with the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the heater 52 is disposed above the transport belt 161 in the chamber 51.
  • the heater 52 is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized, but may also be composed of something that emits electromagnetic waves.
  • the heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire, a halogen lamp, or the like can be used.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is heated in a non-contact manner from above while passing through the chamber 51.
  • the thermoplastic resin is once melted on the surface 902a side of the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the molten thermoplastic resin is naturally cooled, bound, and solidified, for example.
  • a thin film is formed on the surface 902a with respect to the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the fiber-containing material scatters from the ink receiving layer 902 due to static electricity generated by contact with the ink receiving layer solidified portion 15 disposed next to the surface texture processing portion 14, or the ink receiving layer due to vibration caused by conveyance. It is possible to prevent the shape of 902 from collapsing.
  • the heating temperature in the semi-solidification process part 5 is more than the said glass transition temperature of a thermoplastic resin, for example, Preferably it is more than melting
  • the heating temperature is controlled by the control unit 11. Further, the heating time in the semi-solidification processing unit 5 is obtained, for example, by the relationship between the distance that the ink receiving layer 902 moves in the chamber 51 and the speed V16.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is flattened and has a constant thickness. Thereby, the thin film formed on the surface 902a by the semi-solidification process is also maintained in a flattened state.
  • the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 is disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the surface texture processing unit 14, that is, on the positive side in the x-axis direction.
  • the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 executes Step S104.
  • the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 has two solidifying rollers 151. These two solidification rollers 151 are arranged above and below via the conveyor belt 161 and rotate in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 151.
  • Each solidifying roller 151 has a built-in heater 152.
  • the heater 152 is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized.
  • the heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two solidifying rollers 151, the ink receiving layer 902 can be heated and pressed against the ink receiving layer 902 in a direction in which the layer thickness decreases. Thereby, the thermoplastic resin in the ink receiving layer 902 can be fully melted as a whole. Then, after the ink receiving layer 902 has passed between the two solidifying rollers 151, the molten thermoplastic resin is naturally cooled, bonded, and solidified, for example. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 solidified without excess or deficiency is formed, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be fixed to the base material 901.
  • the force with which the two solidifying rollers 151 press the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, preferably 10 kg to 2000 kg, and more preferably 400 kg to 800 kg.
  • the temperature for heating the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 100 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 150 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower.
  • the temperature which heats the ink receiving layer 902 is not limited to the said numerical range, It can also change according to the kind of thermoplastic resin. In this case, it is preferable to heat until the thermoplastic resin is softened or melted.
  • the heating temperature by the upper solidifying roller 151 of the two solidifying rollers 151 and the heating temperature by the lower solidifying roller 151 may be the same or different.
  • the lower solidification roller 151 may be one in which the heater 152 is omitted.
  • the lower solidification roller 151 has a function as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16.
  • the two solidifying rollers 151 may be configured so that the distance between the centers is variable. Thereby, a pressurizing force can be adjusted. This adjustment is also controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is in a flattened state. Thereby, when the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two solidifying rollers 151, the heat conduction from the solidifying roller 151 to the ink receiving layer 902 is improved. Therefore, the ink receiving layer 902 is uniformly heated over the thickness direction.
  • the thickness of the obtained ink receiving layer 902 is 50 ⁇ m.
  • an ink jet printer for example, “PX-M5041F” manufactured by Epson Corporation
  • the ink receiving layer may be solidified in multiple stages.
  • a plurality of sets of two solidification rollers 151 can be installed along the x-axis direction. Then, the heating temperature in each group may be lowered or raised toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. Further, the applied pressure in each set may be lowered or raised toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. Furthermore, you may combine these conditions suitably.
  • step S104 solidification step using the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 is a step in which the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) is solidified by heating and pressing.
  • the recording medium 90 in which the ink receiving layer 902 is fixed to the base material 901 is obtained.
  • the recording medium 90 becomes printable on the ink receiving layer 902 and is discharged from the recording medium reproduction system 100 (recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B).
  • the recording medium 90 has the marking portion 904 formed therein.
  • the marking portion 904 is a symbol including information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer (recording layer)).
  • a marking unit 904 a symbol including information on the fiber-containing layer (recording layer)
  • the step is executed by the marking unit forming unit 20.
  • the marking portion 904 the information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 described above can be confirmed (acquired) as necessary.
  • the marking part 904 is formed on the ink receiving layer 902, and the marking part forming part 20 takes charge of the formation.
  • the marking part forming part 20 is arranged downstream of the ink receiving layer solidifying part 15.
  • the marking part formation part 20 may be comprised with the inkjet printer, for example.
  • the marking portion 904 is formed using a special ink such as fluorescent (invisible) ink (invisible to the naked eye when irradiated with visible light but visible to the naked eye when irradiated with ultraviolet light). Can do.
  • the marking part 904 can be made inconspicuous normally, which is preferable in use of the recording medium 90.
  • the marking part formation part 20 may be comprised so that the marking part 904 may be formed with an electrostatic application system with a fiber containing material other than an inkjet printer.
  • the marking portion 904 is formed on the ink receiving layer 902, the marking portion 904 can be removed together with the ink receiving layer 902 by removing the ink receiving layer 902. Accordingly, the marking portion 904 can be removed and regenerated at the same time, and the correspondence between the ink receiving layer 902 and the marking portion 904 carrying information about the ink receiving layer 902 can be optimized.
  • the marking portion forming portion 20 is disposed on the downstream side of the ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15.
  • the marking portion forming portion 20 is not limited to this. Absent.
  • the marking part 904 may be formed on either the front or back of the base material 901. Further, it may be disposed between the substrate 901 and the ink receiving layer 902 or may be disposed inside the ink receiving layer 902.
  • the recording medium 90 can be manufactured by the recording medium reproduction system 100 configured as described above.
  • the recording medium 90 is favorably printed by, for example, an ink jet method.
  • the recording medium 90 can be printed well even with a laser printer or a copier using toner. Further, the recording medium 90 can be used favorably even by handwriting. In the case of handwriting, for example, a pen or pencil of oil-based ink or water-based ink can be used.
  • the recording medium 90 that has been used after printing on the ink receiving layer 902 may be unnecessary.
  • the recording medium reproduction system 100 removes the ink receiving layer 902 from the used recording medium 90, and then a new ink receiving layer 902 is formed. In this manner, the used recording medium 90 is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium 90 that can be printed again. This reproduction can be repeatedly performed by the recording medium reproduction system 100. Therefore, the recording medium reproduction system 100 is excellent in economy and environmental.
  • the recording medium reproduction system 100 can be installed in any place such as offices, factories, stores such as homes, supermarkets, convenience stores, etc., public institutions such as schools, hospitals, stations, public halls, etc. it can.
  • FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the second embodiment.
  • step S101 the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing.
  • step S101 at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material).
  • the fiber-containing material is removed by polishing, and the flap brush 125 is used for the polishing.
  • a tool suitable for polishing can be used, and therefore the polishing can be performed easily and quickly.
  • the material removing unit 12 has a rotating drum 121, a pump 123, and a flap brush 125.
  • the flap brush 125 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotating drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 121.
  • the flap brush 125 is obtained by winding and fixing a nonwoven fabric 125a around the outer periphery of a cylindrical body. Further, the flap brush 125 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow ⁇ 125 (clockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a driving source thereof, similarly to the rotation direction of the rotary drum 121.
  • the flap brush 125 is moved in the direction of the arrow ⁇ ⁇ b> 125 while the rotary drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated in the direction of the arrow ⁇ ⁇ b> 121. be able to. Accordingly, the ink receiving layer 902 can be polished with the flap brush 125, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed from the substrate 901 without excess or deficiency. Further, it is possible to prevent a cutter mark from being formed on the base material 901 during polishing.
  • the flap brush 125 rotates clockwise when the ink receiving layer 902 is polished.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the flap brush 125 may rotate counterclockwise.
  • a peripheral speed difference is provided between the flap brush 125 and the rotary drum 121.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the third embodiment.
  • step S101 the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing.
  • step S101 at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material).
  • the fiber-containing material is removed by scraping, and the scraper 126 is used.
  • the material removing unit 12 includes a rotating drum 121 and a scraper 126.
  • the scraper 126 is a plate member made of a metal material such as stainless steel, and its longitudinal direction is arranged in parallel to the y-axis direction.
  • the overall length of the scraper 126 is preferably longer than the length of the base material 901 in the y-axis direction.
  • the scraper 126 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotary drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 121.
  • the scraper 126 can be scraped by the scraper 126 by bringing the scraper 126 closer to the rotating drum 121 while the rotating drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed from the base material 901.
  • the fiber-containing material (information recording material) constituting the ink receiving layer 902 is a composite containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material that covers at least a part of the cellulose fibers.
  • the hydrophobic material includes a thermoplastic resin.
  • the scraper 126 includes a heater 126a as a configuration for heating the fiber-containing material when the fiber-containing material is removed.
  • the heater 126a is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized.
  • the heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used.
  • a heating element may be disposed on the drum side instead of the scraper, and the ink receiving layer may be softened and removed while heating.
  • the scraper 126 may adhere to what is removed by scraping the ink receiving layer 902 (hereinafter referred to as “adhesive”). Therefore, it is preferable that the material removing unit 12 has a cleaning unit that removes deposits from the scraper 126. Thereby, whenever it starts removal of a fiber containing material, the scraper 126 from which the deposit
  • ⁇ Fourth embodiment> 12 and 13 are vertical cross-sectional views sequentially showing the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment.
  • step S101 the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing.
  • step S101 at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material).
  • the fiber-containing material is removed by grinding, and the elastic grinder 6 is used for the grinding.
  • a tool suitable for grinding can be used, and therefore grinding can be performed easily and quickly.
  • the material removing unit 12 includes a transport unit 7, an elastic grinder 6 (removing member), and a support roller (platen roller) 8.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 (information recording material) can be removed by the elastic grinder 6 (removal member) while applying a tensile force to the base 901 (recording medium 90 ′) toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. it can.
  • the elastic grinder 6 is obtained by winding and fixing an elastic film 61 around the outer periphery of a cylindrical body. Abrasive grains for grinding are uniformly mixed in the elastic film 61.
  • the elastic grinder 6 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow ⁇ 6 (counterclockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a drive source. Thereby, the elastic grinder 6 (removal member) can remove the printed ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901, that is, the fiber-containing material (information recording material), by rotating in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 6. .
  • the transport unit 7 transports a base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') having a first surface 905 (recording surface) on which a printed ink receiving layer 902 is formed.
  • the transport unit 7 includes two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) and two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers).
  • the two first transport rollers 72 are disposed on the upstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') with respect to the elastic grinder 6 (removal member). These two first transport rollers 72 are arranged one above the other and can rotate in the direction of arrow ⁇ 72. Accordingly, the two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) can rotate while sandwiching the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ′) to transport the base material 901.
  • the two second transport rollers 73 are disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the elastic grinder 6 (removal member). These two second transport rollers 73 are arranged up and down similarly to the first transport roller 72, and can rotate in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 73, respectively. As a result, the two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers) can rotate while sandwiching the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') to transport the base material 901.
  • the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is changeable.
  • This changing method is not particularly limited, and for example, between the first transport roller 72 that is the main driving roller of the two first transport rollers 72 and the motor connected to the first transport roller 72.
  • a method of providing a speed reducer is also included (the same applies to the second transport roller 73).
  • the first conveying roller 72 and the second conveying roller 73 are configured so that the clamping force (grip force) for clamping the substrate 901 can also be changed.
  • the “clamping force” refers to a force required to pull out the base material 901 from the sandwiched state when the base material 901 is held between the two first transport rollers 72 (second transport roller 73). The same applies to).
  • the method for changing the clamping force is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which a cam mechanism is provided in the speed reducer and changed by switching the cam.
  • the support roller 8 is disposed below the elastic grinder 6.
  • the support roller 8 supports the elastic grinder 6 from below. Further, the support roller 8 can rotate in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 8 (clockwise) around the y axis as the substrate 901 is conveyed.
  • the speed of the two first transport rollers 72 (the pair of first rollers) is set to the first speed V72 (Va), and the two first transport rollers 72 (the pair of first rollers).
  • the speed of the two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers) is the second speed V73 (Vb)
  • the two second transport rollers 73 (the pair of second transport rollers 73) 2 rollers) is the second clamping force F73 (Fb)
  • the elastic grinder 6 (removing member) is the third speed V6 (Vc)
  • the elastic grinder 6 (removing member) is the grinding force F6 (Fc).
  • V6 (Vc) ⁇ V73 ( Vb) and F6 (Fc) ⁇ F73 (Fb) is satisfied.
  • the substrate 901 when the ink receiving layer 902 is removed, the substrate 901 can be pulled toward the downstream side in the transport direction, that is, the positive side in the X-axis direction. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be stably removed by one transport (one pass).
  • the fiber-containing material may be removed by multi-stage grinding.
  • a plurality of sets of the elastic grinder 6 and the support roller 8 can be arranged along the x-axis direction.
  • FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG.
  • the leveling processing unit 3 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a scraper (squeegee) 34.
  • the scraper 34 is formed of a long plate member.
  • the scraper 34 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyance belt 161 and is inclined with respect to the x-axis direction, that is, the conveyance direction CD16 of the recording medium 90. Further, both end portions of the scraper 34 are supported by the pedestal 35, respectively. As a result, the scraper 34 is supported on both ends and is stably placed on the conveyor belt 161.
  • the scraper 34 may be configured to be able to change the inclination angle with respect to the transport direction CD16.
  • the leveling processing unit 3 also has three support rollers 32. These three support rollers 32 are arranged at intervals along the x-axis direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, it is preferable that all of the three support rollers 32 intersect with the scraper 34 in a plan view, that is, are partially overlapped. Thereby, the minute unevenness can be stably eliminated without being excessive or insufficient.
  • the distance in the z-axis direction between the scraper 34 and each support roller 32 may be changeable.
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the sixth embodiment.
  • the leveling processing unit 3 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a leveling roller 36 and a support roller 32.
  • the leveling roller 36 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyor belt 161 and is rotatably supported by the rotation support portion 37.
  • the leveling roller 36 can be rotated by being in contact with the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 by a motor (not shown) as a driving source.
  • a spiral groove 361 is formed on the outer periphery of the leveling roller 36. Due to the groove 361, the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 is eliminated by removing minute irregularities and the like that form streaks as the surface 902a moves to the positive side in the x-axis direction. Further, the excess material scraped off moves toward the rotation support portion 37 along the groove 361 and is collected at the destination.
  • FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the seventh embodiment.
  • the semi-solidification processing unit 5 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a chamber 51 and a heater 53.
  • the heater 53 is disposed below the conveyor belt 161 in the chamber 51.
  • the heater 53 is composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized.
  • the heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used.
  • the heater 52 may be disposed below the conveyor belt 161 in the chamber 51 as in the first embodiment.
  • the heating conditions (heating time etc.) of the heater 52 and the heater 53 may be different.
  • FIG. 18 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eighth embodiment.
  • the transfer unit 136 is composed of a corotron or a scorotron.
  • the transfer unit 136 is disposed on the opposite side of the photoreceptor 131 with respect to the conveyor belt 161.
  • the transfer unit 136 separates the photosensitive member 131 (carrying member) on the base material 901 more greatly than the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 (layer) of the fiber-containing material transferred to the base material 901, thereby containing the fiber. Transfer material.
  • transfer can be performed in a non-contact manner, and thus vibration and noise during transfer can be suppressed, for example. Further, non-contact transfer can prevent clogging at the time of transfer, and therefore, occurrence of streaks in the ink receiving layer 902 can be prevented.
  • the fiber-containing material can be prevented from being disturbed and transferred.
  • FIG. 19 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the ninth embodiment.
  • the carrier 18 that carries the fiber-containing material is a rotating body that rotates in the direction of an arrow ⁇ 18 (counterclockwise) about the y axis.
  • the carrier 18 (rotating body) is formed of a core 181 made of a conductive material such as aluminum, and a dielectric (insulating material) such as a resin material formed on the outer periphery of the core 181.
  • the dielectric for example, various resin materials such as polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, and tetrafluoroethylene resin can be used.
  • the layer forming roller 19 is in contact with the carrier 18.
  • the layer forming roller 19 can rotate in the direction of the arrow ⁇ 19 (clockwise) around the y axis. As a result, the layer forming roller 19 can contact the dielectric layer 182 and move the fiber-containing material from the dielectric layer 182 onto the substrate 901 with electrostatic force.
  • the configuration of the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 can be simplified as compared with, for example, the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B conveys the photosensitive member 131, which is a carrier that carries a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, and carries the substrate 901 at a second speed V2. And a transfer unit 134 that transfers the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) to the base material 901. In the transfer unit 134, the fiber-containing material is transferred by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member).
  • the direction CD131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are parallel (same) and satisfy the relationship V1> V2.
  • the method for manufacturing a recording medium includes conveying a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material at a first speed V1, and conveying a base material 901 at a second speed V2, thereby making the fiber-containing material a base material.
  • 901 has a transfer step 901, and in this step, the relationship
  • the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • the transport unit 16 includes a transport roller 163.
  • the transport roller 163 is configured such that two transport rollers 163 form a pair at the top and bottom and transport the substrate 901 between them.
  • each pair of transport rollers 163 is arranged at intervals along the x-axis direction.
  • interval of each pair of conveyance rollers 163 adjacent to x-axis direction is smaller than the space
  • the distance between each pair of transport rollers 163 adjacent in the x-axis direction is preferably smaller than the length of the base material 901 in the x direction.
  • the base material 901 can be conveyed by each conveyance roller 163 rotating to the arrow (alpha) 163 direction, respectively.
  • the transport unit 16 does not need to be a drive roller in which all the transport rollers 163 are connected to a motor, and any transport roller 163 can be a drive roller as long as the substrate 901 can be transported. It is optional.
  • the conveyance part 16 is comprised so that change of the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is possible.
  • the changing method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method of adjusting a voltage applied to a motor connected to the transport roller 163.
  • the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are: It is the same.
  • the speed at which the photoconductor 131 carries the fiber-containing material while being conveyed is V131 (first speed V1)
  • the speed at which the conveyance unit 16 conveys the substrate 901 is V16 (second speed V2). )
  • V131> V16 that is, the first speed V1> the second speed V2).
  • the fiber-containing material is transferred from the photosensitive member 131 to the base material 901, the fiber-containing material is once collected (temporarily) gathered and collected toward the negative side in the x-axis direction at the transfer nip 135. It becomes.
  • the accumulation of the fiber-containing material at the transfer nip 135 reaches the limit, the fiber-containing material is transported together with the base material 901 to be layered.
  • Such a phenomenon can be expressed with a simple configuration in which the magnitude is set between the speed V131 and the speed V16, and the ink receiving layer 902 can be formed as thick as possible due to the phenomenon.
  • the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 formed by this phenomenon can be, for example, 10 ⁇ m or more, and preferably 10 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. Further, it is possible to satisfy the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 by adjusting the rotational speed of the photosensitive member 131 and the transport speed of the transport unit 16 as described above. Each speed adjustment is controlled by the control unit 11.
  • the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 satisfies at least one of the following two conditions (formula 2).
  • the first condition is to satisfy the relationship
  • the second condition is to satisfy the relationship of
  • the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
  • FIG. 22 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eleventh embodiment.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B includes a photoreceptor 131 that is a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit 16 that conveys a base material 901, and the like.
  • a transfer unit 134 that transfers the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) to the substrate 901.
  • the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) and the transporting unit 16 is the direction opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901.
  • the fiber-containing material is a base material with a simple configuration in which the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photoreceptor 131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are opposite directions.
  • 901 can remain relatively large.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • the base material 901 is supplied from the positive side in the x-axis direction and is transported toward the negative side in the x direction by the transport unit 16.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is formed on the substrate 901 by the ink receiving layer forming unit 13. Further, after the formation of the ink receiving layer 902, as shown in FIG. 23, the ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 is subjected to surface texture processing by the surface texture processing section 14 and solidified by the ink receiving layer solidifying section 15.
  • each transport roller 163 rotates in the direction of arrow ⁇ 163 opposite to the direction of arrow ⁇ 163 in the first embodiment.
  • the base material 901 can be conveyed toward the x direction negative side.
  • the transfer unit 134 rotates in the arrow ⁇ 134 direction (counterclockwise) opposite to the arrow ⁇ 134 direction in the first embodiment.
  • the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) is opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16.
  • the transfer nip 135 almost all of the fiber-containing material can be moved onto the base material 901 while hardly remaining on the photoreceptor 131.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 is formed as thick as possible.
  • the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 can be, for example, 10 ⁇ m or more, and preferably 10 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. Further, the occurrence of streak unevenness or the like in the ink receiving layer 902 can be suppressed or prevented. Furthermore, waste of the fiber-containing material can be prevented.
  • the transfer speed of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) at the transfer nip 135 is V131 (first speed V1), and the transfer speed of the substrate 901 by the transfer unit 16 is V16 (second speed V2). It is preferable that the relationship
  • the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 satisfies at least one of the following two conditions (formula 2).
  • the first condition is to satisfy the relationship
  • the second condition is to satisfy the relationship of
  • the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
  • the leveling roller 31 rotates in the arrow ⁇ 31 direction (clockwise) opposite to the arrow ⁇ 31 direction in the first embodiment. Further, the support roller 32 rotates in the ⁇ 32 direction (counterclockwise) opposite to the arrow ⁇ 32 direction in the first embodiment.
  • Such a leveling processing unit 3 can perform leveling processing.
  • each pressure roller 41 rotates in the direction of arrow ⁇ 41 opposite to the direction of arrow ⁇ 41 in the first embodiment.
  • the pressurizing process can be performed by such a pressurizing unit 4.
  • each solidifying roller 151 rotates in the direction of arrow ⁇ 151 opposite to the direction of arrow ⁇ 151 in the first embodiment.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 can be solidified by such an ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15.
  • the marking portion forming portion 20 is disposed on the downstream side of the ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15, for example.
  • FIG. 24 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the twelfth embodiment.
  • the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is a photosensitive member 131 that is a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit 16 that conveys a substrate 901, and a fiber-containing material.
  • a transfer unit 134 that transfers the material 131 (support) to the substrate 901, and transfers the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the photoreceptor 131 (support) to the substrate 901.
  • W2 the weight per unit area of the prepared fiber-containing material
  • the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) is opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16.
  • a method for manufacturing a recording medium includes supporting a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material via a photosensitive member 131 that is a carrier, and the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) to the substrate.
  • W1 is the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material carried on the photosensitive member 131 (supporting body), and W1 is the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate 901.
  • the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more).
  • the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the photoreceptor 131 (support), that is, the basis weight (unit: g / cm 2 ) is transferred to W1 and the substrate 901.
  • the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material that is, the basis weight (unit: g / cm 2 )
  • W2 the basis weight
  • W1 the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material
  • the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
  • the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 can also satisfy both the condition of the magnitude relationship between the weight W1 and the weight W2 and the condition of the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 described above.
  • each unit constituting the recording medium reproducing device can be replaced with any unit that can exhibit the same function.
  • arbitrary components may be added.
  • the recording medium manufacturing method and the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of the present invention may be a combination of any two or more configurations (features) of the above embodiments.
  • thermoplastic resin that is a part of the constituent material of the ink receiving layer
  • a resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or more and 200 ° C. or less is used in the first embodiment.
  • a material having a melting point of 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower may be used.
  • the ink receiving layer is formed leaving a blank portion with respect to the first surface of the base material, that is, formed on a part of the first surface of the base material. It is not limited to this, You may form in the whole surface of the 1st surface of a base material.
  • the ink receiving layer is not limited to a single layer, and may be a laminate, for example.
  • the recording medium may be one in which a base layer is provided between the base material and the ink receiving layer.
  • step S101 material removal step (first step)
  • one of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing is used to remove the composite (information recording material) from the recording medium.
  • two or more of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing may be used in combination. And according to this combination, it is preferable to select and use at least one of a bite, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder as appropriate.
  • the cutting tool was used by step S101, it is not limited to this,
  • the rotary grindstone which sintered the abrasive grain, the rotary cutting blades, such as an end mill, etc. are used. May be.
  • step S102 the fiber-containing material is applied to the base material by electrostatic application, but is not limited thereto.
  • Step S103 surface texture treatment includes three treatments of leveling treatment, pressure treatment, and semi-solidification treatment in the first embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, these three treatments One of these processes may be used, or two processes may be combined.
  • the material removing unit may have an ultrasonic cutter.
  • the ink receiving layer is formed on the first surface of the first surface and the second surface of the base material.
  • the present invention is not limited to this. May also be performed.
  • the ink receiving layer is formed on the second surface.
  • the substrate is turned upside down to form the ink receiving layer on the first surface. It becomes possible by going through.
  • the ink receiving layer is formed on both the first surface and the second surface of the base material, in order to remove each ink receiving layer, for example, first, after removing the ink receiving layer from the first surface The base material is turned upside down. Next, when the ink receiving layer is removed from the second surface, the removal is possible through the same process as the removal of the ink receiving layer from the first surface. In addition, when removing the ink receiving layer from the second surface, the ink receiving layer may be removed simultaneously with the removal of the ink receiving layer from the first surface.
  • the fiber-containing material A is composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 ⁇ m and an average width (minor axis) of 9 ⁇ m, and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000).
  • a powder of ⁇ 40 ⁇ m was mixed in air at a ratio of 2: 8 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment to form a composite.
  • silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed.
  • cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles.
  • the average charge amount was ⁇ 6 ⁇ C / g.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 30mm Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 30V Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Direction of rotation: clockwise Bias: 1380V Peripheral speed (V2): 147.5 mm / s At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 12.1 ⁇ m. -The conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows. Pressure: 100kg / A4 size Surface temperature: 170 ° C Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 10.1 ⁇ m ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901. The speed ratio in Example 1 was
  • 1.21.
  • Example 2 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 3 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 4 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 5 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 1 to Example 5 and Comparative Example 1 to Comparative Example 3 the uniformity unevenness, absorbency and fastness are evaluated, and overall acceptance is determined based on the overall evaluation results. It was judged.
  • the transfer efficiency is the ratio of the basis weight of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 to the basis weight of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131. That is, the transfer efficiency is an evaluation of how the fiber-containing material is transferred from the photoreceptor 131 to the base material 901. Therefore, the evaluation is high when the transfer efficiency is high, and the evaluation is low when the transfer efficiency is low.
  • the transfer omission when the fiber-containing material is transferred to the base material 901, the omission state of the lump of the fiber-containing material on the base material 901 is evaluated. At this time, observation is performed using a microscope.
  • the evaluation result of transfer omission is expressed by a score.
  • the evaluation is high when there are few transfer omissions, and the evaluation is low when there are many transfer omissions.
  • the score is as follows. When there are many missing large chunks: 1 (point) When there are a lot of medium lumps: 2 (points) When there are many small chunks missing: 3 (points) When there are a few small chunks missing: 4 (points) When there is almost no missing small chunk: 5 (points)
  • the above evaluation is performed when printing is performed on an area of 10% with respect to the area of the recording medium (printing 10%) and when printing is performed on an area of 50% with respect to the area of the recording medium (printing 50%). evaluate. Specifically, the score is as follows for each printing ratio. When ink bleeding is large and fiber bleeding is large: 1 (point) When ink bleeding is large and fiber bleeding is inside: 2 (dots) When ink ooze out and fiber bleed out: 3 (dot) When ink bleeding is small and fiber bleeding is small: 4 (dots) When ink exudation is minute and fiber bleeding is small: 5 (points)
  • (C) Method for evaluating fastness To evaluate fastness, ink is ejected onto the formed recording medium for printing, and the printed portion is rubbed with sand eraser five times. And it evaluates by the ratio (x100) of the optical density value of the printing part before and behind rubbing using a commercially available optical densitometer. Accordingly, the evaluation is high when the optical density value ratio ( ⁇ 100) is high, and the evaluation is low when the optical density value ratio ( ⁇ 100) is low. Specifically, the score is as follows.
  • (D) Judgment method The score of transfer omission, the score at 10% printing in absorbency, the score at 50% printing in absorbency, and the robustness score are added. Then, the added value is divided by 4. A pass / fail decision is made based on the result value. Specifically, it is as follows. If it is less than 4 (points): Fail If it is 4 (points) or more: Pass
  • Results Table 1 shows the evaluation results and judgment results.
  • the fiber-containing material B is composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 ⁇ m and an average width (minor axis) of 9 ⁇ m, and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000).
  • the powder of ⁇ 40 ⁇ m was mixed in air at 1.5: 8.5 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to the cellulose fiber by heat treatment to form a composite.
  • silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed.
  • cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles.
  • the average charge amount was ⁇ 4.5 ⁇ C / g.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 30mm Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 30V Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 1380V Peripheral speed (V2): 147.5 mm / s At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the base material 901 was 12.0 ⁇ m. -The conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows. Pressure: 100kg / A4 size Surface temperature: 170 ° C Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 10.1 ⁇ m ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901. The speed ratio in Example 1 was
  • 1.21.
  • Example 2 Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 3 Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 4 Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 1 to Example 6 and Comparative Example 1 to Comparative Example 3 the uniformity unevenness, absorbability, and robustness are evaluated, and overall acceptance is determined based on the overall evaluation results. It was judged.
  • the evaluation method and determination method of uniformity unevenness, absorptivity, and fastness are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.
  • Results Table 2 shows the evaluation results and the judgment results.
  • Fiber-containing material A The formation of the fiber-containing material A is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIG. 24).
  • the conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows.
  • the various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows. Outer diameter: ⁇ 16mm Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 1380V Peripheral speed (V2): 178.5 mm / s At this time, the weight (weight per unit area W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 0.39 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows.
  • Example 2 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 4 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 7 Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
  • the conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
  • the conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
  • Example 1 to Example 8 Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2
  • evaluation of uniformity unevenness, absorbability, and robustness is performed, and overall pass / fail is determined based on all evaluation results. It was judged.
  • evaluation method and determination method of uniformity unevenness, absorptivity, and fastness are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.
  • Results Table 3 shows the evaluation results and the judgment results.
  • SYMBOLS 100 Recording medium reproduction
  • Chamber 511 ... Thermal insulation wall, 512 ... Inlet, 513 ... Outlet, 52 ... Heater, 53 ... Heater , 6 ... elastic grinder, 61 ... elastic film, 7 ... transport unit, 72 ... first transport roller, 73 ... second transport roller, 8 ... support roller (platen roller), 11 ... control unit, 1 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... CPU (central processing part), 112 ... Storage
  • marking part forming part 90 ... recording medium, 90 '... recording medium, 901 ... base material, 902 ... ink receiving layer, 902a ... surface, 903 ... margin part, 904 ... marking part, 905 ... first surface, 906 ... Second surface, CD131 ... conveying direction, CD16 ... conveying direction, F6 ... grinding force, F72 ... first clamping force, F73 ... second clamping force, F121 ... suction force, LB133 ... laser light, S101 to S104 ... step, V31 ... speed, V6 ... third speed, V72 ... first speed, V73 ... second speed, V131 ... speed, V16 ... speed, W1 ... weight, W2 ... weight, ⁇ 6 ...

Landscapes

  • Ink Jet Recording Methods And Recording Media Thereof (AREA)
  • Ink Jet (AREA)

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a recording medium production apparatus which can form a recording layer in the largest thickness as possible (e.g., 10 μm or more) in a simple configuration. A recording medium production apparatus characterized by being equipped with a carrier which carries thereon a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material and delivers the fiber-containing material at a first velocity V1, a delivery unit which delivers a base at a second velocity V2, and a transfer unit which transfers the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the base, wherein the direction of the delivery of the fiber-containing material by the carrier and the direction of the delivery of the base by the delivery unit are parallel to each other in the transfer unit and a relationship represented by the formula: V1 > V2 is satisfied.

Description

記録媒体製造装置および記録媒体の製造方法Recording medium manufacturing apparatus and recording medium manufacturing method
　本発明は、記録媒体製造装置および記録媒体の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method.
　近年では、環境への意識が高まり、職場での紙の使用量の削減だけではなく、職場での紙の再生や、その他、再利用可能な「リユース対応型」の印刷を紙に対して行なうことが求められている。 In recent years, environmental awareness has increased, not only reducing the amount of paper used in the workplace, but also performing paper recycling at the workplace and other “reusable” printing that can be reused. It is demanded.
　例えば特許文献１には、紙の画像形成された面を研磨して、その研磨によって発生した紙粉と糊との混合物を、前記画像が研磨された面に塗布することにより、紙を再生する紙再生方法が記載されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 discloses that paper is regenerated by polishing the image-formed surface of paper and applying a mixture of paper dust and glue generated by the polishing to the surface on which the image has been polished. A paper recycling method is described.
特開平６－２９５１４２号公報JP-A-6-295142
　しかしながら、特許文献１に記載の方法では、紙粉と糊との混合物を前記画像が研磨された面に塗布する際、スプレーを用いており、例えば１回の塗布で当該面上に混合物をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）層状に形成したくても、その層厚は、せいぜい数μｍでしかないと考えられる。 However, in the method described in Patent Document 1, when a mixture of paper powder and glue is applied to the surface on which the image is polished, a spray is used. For example, the mixture can be formed on the surface by a single application. Even if it is desired to form a layer as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more), the layer thickness is considered to be only a few μm at most.
　また、特許文献１に記載の方法では、紙粉に色材が含まれている場合、その色材を再生時に除去することができない。このため、全体が白色の紙を再生しようとしても、再生された紙は、着色されたものとなってしまう。例えば、インクジェット方式によるカラー印刷を施しても、色によっては、その色が鮮明とならないことがある。 Further, in the method described in Patent Document 1, when paper material contains a color material, the color material cannot be removed during reproduction. For this reason, even if an attempt is made to regenerate white paper as a whole, the regenerated paper will be colored. For example, even if color printing is performed by an inkjet method, depending on the color, the color may not be clear.
　本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、簡単な構成で記録層をできる限り均一な厚さで形成することができる記録媒体製造装置および記録媒体の製造方法を提供することにある。また、本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、簡単な構成で記録層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる記録媒体製造装置および記録媒体の製造方法を提供することにある。 One of the objects according to some embodiments of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method capable of forming a recording layer with a uniform thickness as much as possible with a simple configuration. . In addition, one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus and a recording medium manufacturing method capable of forming a recording layer as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more) with a simple configuration. There is.
　また、本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、記録媒体を繰り返し再生することができる記録媒体の再生方法を提供することにある。また、本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、記録媒体を繰り返し再生することができる記録媒体再生装置を提供することにある。 Also, one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium reproducing method capable of repeatedly reproducing the recording medium. Another object of some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium reproducing apparatus capable of repeatedly reproducing a recording medium.
　また、本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれ、また、その後の再生が可能な記録媒体の製造方法を提供することにある。また、本発明のいくつかの態様に係る目的の１つは、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれ、また、その後の再生が可能な記録媒体製造装置を提供することにある。 Also, one of the objects according to some aspects of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a recording medium that can be printed favorably, for example, by an ink jet method and can be reproduced thereafter. Another object of some aspects of the present invention is to provide a recording medium manufacturing apparatus which can be printed favorably by, for example, an inkjet method and can be reproduced thereafter.
　本発明は、上述の課題の少なくとも一部を解決するためになされたものであり、以下の態様、または適用例として実現することが可能である。 The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes or application examples.
　［適用例１］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、基材を搬送する搬送部と、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは平行（同方向）であることを特徴とする。 [Application Example 1] A recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit that conveys a substrate, and the fiber-containing material. A transfer portion that transfers the carrier-containing material to the base material, and in the transfer portion, the transport direction of the fiber-containing material by the support body is parallel to the transport direction of the base material by the transport portion ( (Same direction).
　これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層を均一な厚さに形成することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to form the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material with a uniform thickness.
　［適用例２］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ、第１速度Ｖ１で搬送する担持体と、基材を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送する搬送部と、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは、平行（同じ）であり、Ｖ１＞Ｖ２なる関係を満足することを特徴とする。 [Application Example 2] The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example carries a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, and conveys a carrier at a first speed V1 and a substrate at a second speed V2. And a transfer unit that transfers the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the substrate. In the transfer unit, the transfer direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier, and the transfer unit The transport direction of the base material is parallel (same) and satisfies the relationship of V1> V2.
　これにより、第１速度Ｖ１と第２速度Ｖ２との間に大小をつけるという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を基材に比較的多く留まらせることができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 Thereby, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be retained on the base material with a simple configuration in which the size is increased between the first speed V1 and the second speed V2. Thereby, the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　［適用例３］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、基材を搬送する搬送部と、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは反対方向であることを特徴とする。 Application Example 3 A recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a carrier that conveys a base material, and the fiber-containing material. A transfer portion that transfers the carrier-containing material to the base material, wherein the transfer portion transports the fiber-containing material in a direction opposite to the transport direction of the base material by the transport portion. It is characterized by being.
　これにより、担持体による繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、搬送部による基材の搬送方向とを反対方向とするという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を基材に比較的多く留まらせることができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 Thereby, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be retained on the substrate with a simple configuration in which the conveying direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier is opposite to the conveying direction of the substrate by the conveying unit. Thereby, the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　［適用例４］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送速度を第１速度Ｖ１、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送速度を第２速度Ｖ２としたとき、｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。
　これにより、できる限り厚い記録層の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 Application Example 4 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example, when the conveyance speed of the fiber-containing material by the carrier is the first speed V1, and the conveyance speed of the substrate by the conveyance unit is the second speed V2. , | V1 |> | V2 |
As a result, the thickest recording layer can be formed stably and quickly.
　［適用例５］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＞１．２なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。
　これにより、できる限り厚い記録層の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 Application Example 5 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the relationship | V1 | / | V2 |> 1.2 is satisfied.
As a result, the thickest recording layer can be formed stably and quickly.
　［適用例６］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＜１５なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。
　これにより、できる限り厚い記録層の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 Application Example 6 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the relationship | V1 | / | V2 | <15 is satisfied.
As a result, the thickest recording layer can be formed stably and quickly.
　［適用例７］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、基材を搬送する搬送部と、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、前記担持体に担持されている前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、前記基材に転写された前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足することを特徴とする。 Application Example 7 A recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example includes a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit that conveys a substrate, and the fiber-containing material. A transfer portion for transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the substrate, wherein the weight of the fiber-containing material carried on the carrier is W1, and the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate. When the weight per unit area is W2, the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0 is satisfied.
　これにより、重量Ｗ１と重量Ｗ２との間に大小をつけるという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を担持体から基材に比較的多く転写することができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 Thereby, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be transferred from the carrier to the substrate with a simple configuration in which the size is set between the weight W1 and the weight W2. Thereby, the ink receiving layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　［適用例８］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＜１５なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。
　これにより、できる限り厚い記録層の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 Application Example 8 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the relationship W2 / W1 <15 is satisfied.
As a result, the thickest recording layer can be formed stably and quickly.
　［適用例９］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記担持体は、回転体であるのが好ましい。
　これにより、担持体は、回転しつつ、転写部とともに繊維含有材料を基材に安定して転写することができる。 Application Example 9 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the carrier is a rotating body.
Thereby, the carrier can stably transfer the fiber-containing material to the substrate together with the transfer portion while rotating.
　［適用例１０］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記回転体は、外周部に誘電体層を有するのが好ましい。
　これにより、繊維含有材料を転写する装置構成を簡単なものとすることができる。 Application Example 10 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example, it is preferable that the rotating body has a dielectric layer on an outer peripheral portion.
Thereby, the apparatus structure which transfers a fiber containing material can be simplified.
　［適用例１１］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記転写部は、静電気力によって前記繊維含有材料を転写するものであるのが好ましい。 Application Example 11 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example, it is preferable that the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material by electrostatic force.
　これにより、静電気力を用いるという簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を基材に容易に付着させることができる。 Thereby, the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the base material by a simple method of using electrostatic force.
　［適用例１２］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記転写部は、前記担持体との間で前記基材を挟持して、前記繊維含有材料の転写を行なうのが好ましい。 Application Example 12 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material while sandwiching the base material with the carrier.
　これにより、挟持を用いるという簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を基材に安定して付着させることができる。 This makes it possible to stably adhere the fiber-containing material to the base material by a simple method of using clamping.
　［適用例１３］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記転写部は、前記基材上で前記担持体を、前記基材に転写される前記繊維含有材料の層の厚さよりも大きく離間させて、前記繊維含有材料の転写を行なうのが好ましい。 Application Example 13 In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example, the transfer unit separates the carrier on the base material to be larger than the thickness of the fiber-containing material layer transferred to the base material. It is preferable to transfer the fiber-containing material.
　これにより、非接触による転写を行なうことができ、よって、例えば転写時の騒音を抑制することができる。 As a result, non-contact transfer can be performed, and for example, noise during transfer can be suppressed.
　［適用例１４］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、３未満であるのが好ましい。 [Application Example 14] In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fiber is less than 3.
　これにより、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができ、よって、例えば静電塗布によって繊維含有材料を均一に塗布することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to suppress the entanglement of the cellulose fibers, and thus the fiber-containing material can be uniformly applied by, for example, electrostatic application.
　［適用例１５］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置では、前記セルロース繊維の平均長さは、１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下であるのが好ましい。 [Application Example 15] In the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of this application example, it is preferable that the average length of the cellulose fibers is 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less.
　これにより、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができ、よって、例えば静電塗布によって繊維含有材料を均一に塗布することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to suppress the entanglement of the cellulose fibers, and thus the fiber-containing material can be uniformly applied by, for example, electrostatic application.
　［適用例１６］本適用例の記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を第１速度Ｖ１で搬送するとともに、基材を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送して、前記繊維含有材料を前記基材に転写するステップを有し、前記ステップでは、｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足することを特徴とする。 [Application Example 16] A recording medium manufacturing method according to this application example conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material at a first speed V1, and conveys a substrate at a second speed V2. A step of transferring the fiber-containing material to the substrate, wherein the step satisfies a relationship of | V1 |> | V2 |.
　これにより、第１速度Ｖ１と第２速度Ｖ２との間に大小をつけるという簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を基材に比較的多く留まらせることができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成される記録層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 Thereby, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be retained on the base material by a simple method of increasing or decreasing between the first speed V1 and the second speed V2. Thereby, the recording layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　［適用例１７］本適用例の記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持体で担持して、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から基材に転写する転写ステップを有し、前記担持体に担持されている前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、前記基材に転写された前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足することを特徴とする。 [Application Example 17] A recording medium manufacturing method according to this application example includes supporting a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a carrier, and transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to a substrate. A transfer step, wherein the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the carrier is W1, and the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate is W2. It satisfies the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0.
　これにより、重量Ｗ１と重量Ｗ２との間に大小をつけるという簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を担持体から基材に比較的多く転写することができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成される記録層をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 Thereby, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be transferred from the carrier to the base material by a simple method in which the size is set between the weight W1 and the weight W2. Thereby, the recording layer composed of the fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　［適用例１８］本適用例の記録媒体の再生方法は、情報が記録された記録面を有する記録媒体から新たに記録媒体を再生する方法であって、前記記録面に付与され、前記情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を前記記録面から除去する第１ステップと、前記情報記録材料が除去された前記記録面の少なくとも一部に、セルロース繊維を含む繊維含有材料で構成された繊維含有層を形成する第２ステップと、を有することを特徴とする。 [Application Example 18] A recording medium reproduction method according to this application example is a method of newly reproducing a recording medium from a recording medium having a recording surface on which information is recorded. A first step of removing the information recording material provided for recording from the recording surface, and at least a part of the recording surface from which the information recording material has been removed include a fiber containing fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers. And a second step of forming a layer.
　これにより、情報が記録され、不要となった記録媒体は、その情報が抹消され、さらに再度の情報の記録が可能な記録媒体として再生される。また、この再生は、繰り返し行なうことが可能であり、よって、経済性に優れ、環境性にも優れる。 As a result, the recording medium in which information is recorded and is no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium in which the information is deleted and information can be recorded again. In addition, this regeneration can be performed repeatedly, so that it is economical and environmentally friendly.
　［適用例１９］上記適用例１８に記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記第１ステップでは、前記情報記録材料の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つで行なうのが好ましい。 Application Example 19 In the recording medium reproducing method described in Application Example 18, in the first step, it is preferable that the information recording material is removed by at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding, and polishing. .
　これにより、情報記録材料の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つの機械加工から適宜選択して行なうことができ、よって、情報記録材料の除去を容易かつ迅速に行なうことができる。 As a result, the information recording material can be removed by appropriately selecting from at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing, and therefore the information recording material can be easily and quickly removed. .
　［適用例２０］上記適用例１９に記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記第１ステップでは、前記情報記録材料の除去に、除去部材として、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを用いるのが好ましい。 Application Example 20 In the recording medium reproducing method according to Application Example 19, in the first step, at least one of a bite, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder is used as a removing member for removing the information recording material. It is preferable to use one.
　これにより、情報記録材料の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つの機械加工から適宜選択して行なうことができ、その際、選択された機械加工に適した工具を用いることができる。 Thereby, the removal of the information recording material can be performed by appropriately selecting from at least one machining among cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing, and a tool suitable for the selected machining can be used. it can.
　［適用例２１］上記適用例１８から２０のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記第１ステップでは、前記情報記録材料を加熱しつつ、前記情報記録材料の除去を行なうのが好ましい。 Application Example 21 In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 18 to 20, it is preferable that in the first step, the information recording material is removed while heating the information recording material. .
　これにより、情報記録材料が軟化し、よって、情報記録材料の除去を容易に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the information recording material is softened, so that the information recording material can be easily removed.
　［適用例２２］上記適用例１８から２１のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記第２ステップでは、前記繊維含有層の形成を静電塗布により行なうのが好ましい。 [Application Example 22] In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 18 to 21, it is preferable that in the second step, the fiber-containing layer is formed by electrostatic coating.
　これにより、静電塗布という比較的簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を記録面に容易にしかもオンデマンドで付着させることができる。 Thereby, the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the recording surface on demand by a relatively simple method of electrostatic coating.
　［適用例２３］上記適用例２２に記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記繊維含有層に関する情報を含むシンボルを形成するステップを有するのが好ましい。
　これにより、繊維含有層に関する情報を必要に応じて確認（取得）することができる。 [Application Example 23] The recording medium reproducing method according to Application Example 22 preferably includes a step of forming a symbol including information on the fiber-containing layer.
Thereby, the information regarding a fiber content layer can be checked (acquired) as needed.
　［適用例２４］上記適用例１８から２３のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、３未満であるのが好ましい。 [Application Example 24] In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 18 to 23, the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers is preferably less than 3.
　これにより、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができ、よって、繊維含有層となる繊維含有材料を均一に静電塗布することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to suppress the entanglement of the cellulose fibers, and thus it is possible to uniformly electrostatically apply the fiber-containing material to be the fiber-containing layer.
　［適用例２５］上記適用例１８から２４のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記繊維含有材料は、前記セルロース繊維の少なくとも一部を被覆している疎水性材料を含み、前記疎水性材料は、熱可塑性樹脂を含むのが好ましい。 Application Example 25 In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 18 to 24, the fiber-containing material includes a hydrophobic material that covers at least a part of the cellulose fiber, and the hydrophobic material The conductive material preferably contains a thermoplastic resin.
　これにより、繊維含有層が、より安定した帯電特性（特に、負帯電性）を有するものとなる。また、熱可塑性樹脂を含むことにより、セルロース繊維同士を加熱処理により結着することが可能となる。 As a result, the fiber-containing layer has more stable charging characteristics (particularly negative chargeability). Moreover, it becomes possible to bind cellulose fibers by heat processing by including a thermoplastic resin.
　［適用例２６］上記適用例２５に記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記繊維含有層中の前記熱可塑性樹脂の含有量をＷａ（質量％）としたとき、Ｗａは、１０質量％以上４０質量％未満であるのが好ましい。 [Application Example 26] In the recording medium reproduction method described in Application Example 25, when the content of the thermoplastic resin in the fiber-containing layer is Wa (mass%), Wa is 10 mass% or more and 40 It is preferable that it is less than mass%.
　これにより、含有量Ｗａが前記下限値以上であれば、セルロース繊維の結着力を確保することができ、セルロース繊維が繊維含有層から脱落することを抑制することができる。含有量Ｗａが前記上限値未満であれば、繊維含有層の疎水性が高くなりすぎて例えばインクを弾いてしまうことを抑制することができ、印刷品質を向上させることができる。 Thereby, when the content Wa is equal to or higher than the lower limit value, it is possible to secure the binding force of the cellulose fibers and to prevent the cellulose fibers from falling off the fiber-containing layer. If content Wa is less than the said upper limit, it can suppress that the hydrophobicity of a fiber content layer becomes high too much, for example, flips ink, and can improve printing quality.
　［適用例２７］上記適用例２５または２６に記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度は、５０℃以上２００℃以下であるのが好ましい。 Application Example 27 In the recording medium reproduction method described in Application Example 25 or 26, the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is preferably 50 ° C. or more and 200 ° C. or less.
　これにより、熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度が前記下限値以上であれば、摩擦程度の加熱で繊維含有層が剥がれることを抑制することができ、繊維含有層の強度が低下することを抑制することができる。熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度が前記上限値以下であれば、例えば繊維含有層となる繊維含有材料を加熱加圧して固着させる際に、記録媒体を前記上限値よりも高い温度まで加熱する必要がなく、セルロース繊維が熱によりダメージを受けることを抑制することができる。 Thereby, if the glass transition temperature of a thermoplastic resin is more than the said lower limit, it can suppress that a fiber content layer peels off by heating of a friction grade, and can suppress that the intensity of a fiber content layer falls. Can do. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, for example, when the fiber-containing material to be the fiber-containing layer is fixed by heating and pressurizing, it is necessary to heat the recording medium to a temperature higher than the upper limit value. In addition, the cellulose fibers can be prevented from being damaged by heat.
　［適用例２８］上記適用例２５から２７のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記疎水性材料は、帯電制御剤を含むのが好ましい。 [Application Example 28] In the recording medium reproducing method according to any one of Application Examples 25 to 27, the hydrophobic material preferably contains a charge control agent.
　これにより、繊維含有層となる繊維含有材料は、安定した帯電性、より大きな帯電性を有することができる。 Thereby, the fiber-containing material that becomes the fiber-containing layer can have stable chargeability and greater chargeability.
　［適用例２９］上記適用例２５から２８のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記疎水性材料は、白色顔料を含むのが好ましい。
　これにより、繊維含有層の白色度を好適に調整することができる。 Application Example 29 In the recording medium reproducing method described in any one of Application Examples 25 to 28, the hydrophobic material preferably contains a white pigment.
Thereby, the whiteness of a fiber content layer can be adjusted suitably.
　［適用例３０］上記適用例２５から２９のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記セルロース繊維の平均長さは、１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下であるのが好ましい。 [Application Example 30] In the recording medium reproduction method according to any one of Application Examples 25 to 29, the average length of the cellulose fibers is preferably 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less.
　これにより、繊維含有層を形成する際、乾式方式でセルロース繊維の長さを小さくすることができ、かつ、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができ、よって、繊維含有層となる繊維含有材料を均一に静電塗布することができる。 Thereby, when forming the fiber-containing layer, the length of the cellulose fibers can be reduced by a dry method, and the cellulose fibers can be prevented from being entangled with each other. The material can be uniformly electrostatically applied.
　［適用例３１］上記適用例２５から３０のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の再生方法では、前記繊維含有層は、インクを受容するインク受容層であるのが好ましい。 Application Example 31 In the recording medium reproduction method according to any one of Application Examples 25 to 30, it is preferable that the fiber-containing layer is an ink receiving layer that receives ink.
　これにより、インク受容層、例えばインクジェットプリンターの印刷ヘッドから吐出されたインクを容易に受容し浸透させることができる。その結果、インク受容層に印刷が施されることとなる。 Thereby, ink ejected from an ink receiving layer, for example, a print head of an ink jet printer, can be easily received and permeated. As a result, the ink receiving layer is printed.
　［適用例３２］本適用例の記録媒体再生装置は、情報が記録された記録面を有する記録媒体から新たに記録媒体を再生する装置であって、前記記録面に付与され、前記情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を前記記録面から除去する材料除去部と、前記情報記録材料が除去された前記記録面の少なくとも一部に、セルロース繊維を含む繊維含有材料で構成された繊維含有層を形成する繊維含有層形成部と、を備えることを特徴とする。 [Application Example 32] A recording medium reproducing apparatus according to this application example is an apparatus that newly reproduces a recording medium from a recording medium having a recording surface on which information is recorded, and is provided on the recording surface to record the information. A material removing section for removing the information recording material provided to the recording surface, and a fiber-containing layer composed of a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers on at least a part of the recording surface from which the information recording material has been removed And a fiber-containing layer forming part for forming the structure.
　これにより、情報が記録され、不要となった記録媒体は、その情報が抹消され、さらに再度の情報の記録が可能な記録媒体として再生される。また、この再生は、繰り返し行なうことが可能であり、よって、経済性に優れ、環境性にも優れる。 As a result, the recording medium in which information is recorded and is no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium in which the information is deleted and information can be recorded again. In addition, this regeneration can be performed repeatedly, so that it is economical and environmentally friendly.
　［適用例３３］上記適用例３２に記載の記録媒体再生装置では、前記材料除去部は、回転することにより前記情報記録材料を除去する除去部材を有し、前記記録媒体に引張り力を付与しながら、前記除去部材で前記情報記録材料を除去するのが好ましい。 Application Example 33 In the recording medium reproducing apparatus according to Application Example 32, the material removing unit includes a removing member that removes the information recording material by rotating, and applies a tensile force to the recording medium. However, it is preferable to remove the information recording material with the removing member.
　これにより、例えば記録媒体が可撓性を有するものである場合、その記録媒体の情報記録材料を容易に除去することができる。 Thereby, for example, when the recording medium is flexible, the information recording material of the recording medium can be easily removed.
　［適用例３４］上記適用例３２または３３に記載の記録媒体再生装置では、前記材料除去部は、前記記録面を有する前記記録媒体を搬送する搬送部と、回転することにより前記情報記録材料を除去する除去部材と、を有し、前記搬送部は、前記除去部材に対して当該記録媒体の搬送方向上流側に配置され、当該記録媒体を挟持しつつ回転する一対の第１ローラーと、前記除去部材に対して前記搬送方向下流側に配置され、当該記録媒体を挟持しつつ回転する一対の第２ローラーと、を有し、前記一対の第１ローラーの速度をＶａ、前記一対の第１ローラーの挟持力をＦａ、前記一対の第２ローラーの速度をＶｂ、前記一対の第２ローラーの挟持力をＦｂ、前記除去部材の速度をＶｃ、前記除去部材の研削力をＦｃとしたとき、前記一対の第１ローラーが当該記録媒体を挟持している場合には、Ｖａ＜Ｖｃ、かつ、Ｆａ＞Ｆｃを満足し、前記一対の第１ローラーによる当該記録媒体の挟持が解除された場合には、Ｖｃ＜Ｖｂ、かつ、Ｆｃ＜Ｆｂを満足するのが好ましい。 Application Example 34 In the recording medium reproducing apparatus according to Application Example 32 or 33, the material removing unit rotates the information recording material by rotating with a transport unit that transports the recording medium having the recording surface. A pair of first rollers that are disposed on the upstream side in the transport direction of the recording medium with respect to the removal member, and rotate while sandwiching the recording medium; A pair of second rollers that are disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction with respect to the removing member and rotate while sandwiching the recording medium, and the speed of the pair of first rollers is Va, and the pair of first rollers When the clamping force of the roller is Fa, the speed of the pair of second rollers is Vb, the clamping force of the pair of second rollers is Fb, the speed of the removing member is Vc, and the grinding force of the removing member is Fc, Said pair of first When the roller is sandwiching the recording medium, Va <Vc and Fa> Fc are satisfied, and when the recording medium is not sandwiched by the pair of first rollers, Vc <Vb In addition, it is preferable that Fc <Fb is satisfied.
　これにより、記録面上の情報記録材料を除去する際、記録媒体を搬送方向下流側に向かって引っ張った状態とすることができ、よって、情報記録材料の除去を１回の搬送（ワンパス）で安定して行なうことができる。 Thereby, when removing the information recording material on the recording surface, the recording medium can be pulled toward the downstream side in the transport direction, and thus the information recording material can be removed by one transport (one pass). It can be performed stably.
　［適用例３５］本適用例の記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成された記録層を基材に形成する層形成ステップと、前記記録層の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理ステップと、前記記録層を固化する固化ステップと、を有することを特徴とする。 [Application Example 35] A recording medium manufacturing method according to this application example includes a layer forming step of forming a recording layer made of a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate, and a surface of the recording layer. And a solidification step for solidifying the recording layer.
　これにより、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれる記録層を有する記録媒体を製造することができる。また、記録層に印刷が施された記録媒体は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、印刷済みの記録媒体は、記録層が除去され、その後新たな記録層が形成され得る。このように、印刷済みの記録媒体は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体として再生される（製造される）。 Thereby, for example, it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method. In addition, a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary. In this case, the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed. Thus, the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
　［適用例３６］上記適用例３５に記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記記録層に関する情報を含むシンボルを形成するステップを有するのが好ましい。
　これにより、繊維含有層に関する情報を必要に応じて確認（取得）することができる。 [Application Example 36] The recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 35 preferably includes a step of forming a symbol including information on the recording layer.
Thereby, the information regarding a fiber content layer can be checked (acquired) as needed.
　［適用例３７］上記適用例３５または３６に記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記層形成ステップでは、前記記録層の形成を静電塗布により行なうのが好ましい。 [Application Example 37] In the recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 35 or 36, it is preferable that the recording layer is formed by electrostatic coating in the layer forming step.
　これにより、静電塗布という比較的簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を基材に容易に付着させることができる。 Thereby, the fiber-containing material can be easily attached to the base material by a relatively simple method of electrostatic coating.
　［適用例３８］上記適用例３６または３７に記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理ステップ中または前記処理ステップと前記固化ステップとの間に、前記記録層に対して除電を行なうのが好ましい。
　これにより、記録層に静電気が帯びた場合、その静電気を放出することができる。 Application Example 38 In the recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 36 or 37, it is preferable that the recording layer is neutralized during the processing step or between the processing step and the solidification step. .
Accordingly, when static electricity is applied to the recording layer, the static electricity can be discharged.
　［適用例３９］上記適用例３５から３８のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、３未満であるのが好ましい。
　これにより、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができ、よって、記録層となる繊維含有材料を均一に静電塗布することができる。 Application Example 39 In the method for manufacturing a recording medium according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 38, the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers is preferably less than 3.
Thereby, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles, Therefore The fiber containing material used as a recording layer can be electrostatically apply | coated uniformly.
　［適用例４０］上記適用例３５から３９のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理は、前記記録層の表面を平坦化する平坦化処理を含むのが好ましい。 [Application Example 40] In the recording medium manufacturing method according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 39, the treatment preferably includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer.
　これにより、記録層の表面を平滑な状態とすることができる、すなわち、記録層の表面が平坦化される。 Thereby, the surface of the recording layer can be made smooth, that is, the surface of the recording layer is flattened.
　［適用例４１］上記適用例３５から４０のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理は、前記記録層の表面を半固化する半固化処理を含むのが好ましい。 Application Example 41 In the recording medium manufacturing method according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 40, it is preferable that the treatment includes a semi-solidification process for semi-solidifying the surface of the recording layer.
　これにより、記録層の構成材料である繊維含有材料の飛散防止や、記録層の形状維持等を図ることができる。 Thereby, it is possible to prevent scattering of the fiber-containing material, which is a constituent material of the recording layer, and to maintain the shape of the recording layer.
　［適用例４２］上記適用例３５から４１のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理は、前記記録層を加圧する加圧処理を含むのが好ましい。 [Application Example 42] In the recording medium manufacturing method according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 41, it is preferable that the process includes a pressurizing process for pressurizing the recording layer.
　これにより、記録層に対する高密度化を行なうことができ、よって、記録層内での繊維含有材料の疎密を解消することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to increase the density of the recording layer, thereby eliminating the density of the fiber-containing material in the recording layer.
　［適用例４３］上記適用例３５から３９のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理は、前記記録層の表面を平坦化する平坦化処理と、前記記録層の表面を半固化する半固化処理とを含み、前記処理ステップでは、前記平坦化処理、前記半固化処理の順に前記処理を行なうのが好ましい。 [Application Example 43] In the recording medium manufacturing method according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 39, the treatment includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer and a semi-solidification of the surface of the recording layer. In the processing step, it is preferable to perform the processing in the order of the flattening processing and the semi-solidifying processing.
　これにより、記録層の構成材料である繊維含有材料の飛散防止や、記録層の形状維持等を図ることができる。 Thereby, it is possible to prevent scattering of the fiber-containing material, which is a constituent material of the recording layer, and to maintain the shape of the recording layer.
　［適用例４４］上記適用例４３に記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記処理は、前記記録層の表面を平坦化する平坦化処理と、前記記録層を加圧する加圧処理、前記記録層の表面を半固化する半固化処理とを含み、前記処理ステップでは、前記平坦化処理、前記加圧処理、前記半固化処理の順に前記処理を行なうのが好ましい。 Application Example 44 In the recording medium manufacturing method according to Application Example 43, the treatment includes a flattening treatment for flattening a surface of the recording layer, a pressurizing treatment for pressurizing the recording layer, and the recording layer. In the process step, the flattening process, the pressurizing process, and the semisolidifying process are preferably performed in this order.
　これにより、記録層に対する高密度化を行なうことができ、よって、記録層内での繊維含有材料の疎密を解消することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to increase the density of the recording layer, thereby eliminating the density of the fiber-containing material in the recording layer.
　［適用例４５］上記適用例３５から４４のいずれかに記載の記録媒体の製造方法では、前記固化ステップは、前記記録層の固化を加熱および加圧により行なうのが好ましい。
　これにより、記録層を基材に固着することができる。 Application Example 45 In the method for manufacturing a recording medium according to any one of Application Examples 35 to 44, it is preferable that the solidification step is performed by heating and pressurizing the recording layer.
Thereby, the recording layer can be fixed to the substrate.
　［適用例４６］本適用例の記録媒体製造装置は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成された記録層を基材に形成する記録層形成部と、前記記録層の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理部と、前記記録層を固化する固化部と、を備えることを特徴とする。 Application Example 46 A recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to this application example includes a recording layer forming unit that forms a recording layer made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a base material, and a surface of the recording layer. It is characterized by comprising a processing section for performing processing for adjusting properties and a solidifying section for solidifying the recording layer.
　これにより、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれる記録層を有する記録媒体を製造することができる。また、記録層に印刷が施された記録媒体は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、印刷済みの記録媒体は、記録層が除去され、その後新たな記録層が形成され得る。このように、印刷済みの記録媒体は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体として再生される（製造される）。 Thereby, for example, it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method. In addition, a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary. In this case, the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed. Thus, the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
　［適用例４７］本適用例の記録媒体の再生方法は、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を基材から除去する除去ステップと、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成された記録層を前記基材に形成する層形成ステップと、前記記録層の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理ステップと、前記記録層を固化する固化ステップと、を有することを特徴とする。 Application Example 47 A recording medium reproduction method according to this application example includes a removal step of removing the information recording material used for recording information from the base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material. A layer forming step for forming the recording layer on the substrate, a processing step for performing a process for adjusting the surface properties of the recording layer, and a solidifying step for solidifying the recording layer.
　これにより、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれる記録層を有する記録媒体を製造することができる。また、記録層に印刷が施された記録媒体は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、印刷済みの記録媒体は、記録層が除去され、その後新たな記録層が形成され得る。このように、印刷済みの記録媒体は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体として再生される（製造される）。 Thereby, for example, it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method. In addition, a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary. In this case, the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed. Thus, the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
　［適用例４８］本適用例の記録媒体再生装置は、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を基材から除去する材料除去部と、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成された記録層を前記基材に形成する記録層形成部と、前記記録層の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理部と、前記記録層を固化する固化部と、を備えることを特徴とする。 [Application Example 48] A recording medium reproducing apparatus according to this application example includes a material removing unit that removes an information recording material used for recording information from a base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material. A recording layer forming section for forming the recording layer on the substrate, a processing section for performing a process for adjusting the surface properties of the recording layer, and a solidifying section for solidifying the recording layer.
　これにより、例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれる記録層を有する記録媒体を製造することができる。また、記録層に印刷が施された記録媒体は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、印刷済みの記録媒体は、記録層が除去され、その後新たな記録層が形成され得る。このように、印刷済みの記録媒体は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体として再生される（製造される）。 Thereby, for example, it is possible to manufacture a recording medium having a recording layer that is favorably printed by the ink jet method. In addition, a recording medium on which the recording layer is printed may be unnecessary. In this case, the recording layer is removed from the printed recording medium, and then a new recording layer can be formed. Thus, the printed recording medium is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium that can be printed again.
図１は、第１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムの主要部を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the main part of the recording medium playback system of the first embodiment. 図２は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムで行なわれる各ステップを順に示す図（フローチャート）である。FIG. 2 is a diagram (flowchart) sequentially illustrating each step performed in the recording medium playback system shown in FIG. 図３は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムで製造される記録媒体の一例を示す平面図である。FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an example of a recording medium manufactured by the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 図４は、図３中のＡ－Ａ線断面図である。4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 図５は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 図６は、図５中の矢印Ｂ方向から見た図である。6 is a view as seen from the direction of arrow B in FIG. 図７は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 図８は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。8 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 図９は、図８中の二点鎖線で囲まれた領域［Ｃ］の拡大図である。FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a region [C] surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 図１０は、第２実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the second embodiment. 図１１は、第３実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す平面図である。FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the third embodiment. 図１２は、第４実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部の作動状態を順に示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view sequentially illustrating the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment. 図１３は、第４実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部の作動状態を順に示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view sequentially illustrating the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment. 図１４は、第５実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す平面図である。FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fifth embodiment. 図１５は、図１４中のＤ－Ｄ断面図である。FIG. 15 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 図１６は、第６実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す平面図である。FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the sixth embodiment. 図１７は、第７実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the seventh embodiment. 図１８は、第８実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置のインク受容層形成部を示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 18 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eighth embodiment. 図１９は、第９実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置のインク受容層形成部を示す垂直断面図である。FIG. 19 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the ninth embodiment. 図２０は、第１０実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 20 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment. 図２１は、第１０実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 21 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment. 図２２は、第１１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 22 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the eleventh embodiment. 図２３は、第１１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 23 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eleventh embodiment. 図２４は、第１２実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。FIG. 24 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the twelfth embodiment.
　以下、本発明の好適な実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置を、添付図面を示し詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
　＜第１実施形態＞
　図１は、第１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムの主要部を示すブロック図である。図２は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムで行なわれる各ステップを順に示す図（フローチャート）である。図３は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムで製造される記録媒体の一例を示す平面図である。図４は、図３中のＡ－Ａ線断面図である。図５は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す垂直断面図である。図６は、図５中の矢印Ｂ方向から見た図である。図７は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。図８は、図１に示す記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。図９は、図８中の二点鎖線で囲まれた領域［Ｃ］の拡大図である。なお、以下では、説明の便宜上、互いに直交する３つの座標軸、すなわち、ｘ軸、ｙ軸およびｚ軸が描かれた図面がある。この図面では、ｘ軸とｙ軸を含むｘｙ平面が水平方向となっており、ｚ軸が鉛直方向となっている。また、ｘ軸に平行な方向を「ｘ軸方向（第１の方向）」とも言い、ｙ軸に平行な方向を「ｙ軸方向（第２の方向）」とも言い、ｚ軸に平行な方向を「ｚ軸方向（第３の方向）」とも言う。また、各方向の矢印が向いた方向を「正」、その反対方向を「負」と言う。また、座標軸が描かれた図面では、その上側を「上」または「上方」、下側を「下」または「下方」と言うことがある。また、座標軸が描かれた図面では、その左側を「上流側」、右側を「下流側」と言うことがある。 <First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the main part of the recording medium playback system of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (flowchart) sequentially illustrating each step performed in the recording medium playback system shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an example of a recording medium manufactured by the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 6 is a view as seen from the direction of arrow B in FIG. FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. 8 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a region [C] surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In the following, for convenience of explanation, there are drawings in which three coordinate axes orthogonal to each other, that is, the x axis, the y axis, and the z axis are drawn. In this drawing, the xy plane including the x axis and the y axis is the horizontal direction, and the z axis is the vertical direction. A direction parallel to the x-axis is also referred to as “x-axis direction (first direction)”, a direction parallel to the y-axis is also referred to as “y-axis direction (second direction)”, and a direction parallel to the z-axis. Is also referred to as “z-axis direction (third direction)”. The direction in which the arrow in each direction is directed is called “positive”, and the opposite direction is called “negative”. In the drawing in which the coordinate axes are drawn, the upper side may be referred to as “upper” or “upper”, and the lower side may be referred to as “lower” or “lower”. In the drawing in which the coordinate axes are drawn, the left side may be referred to as “upstream side” and the right side may be referred to as “downstream side”.
　記録媒体の再生方法は、情報が記録された第１面９０５（記録面）を有する記録媒体９０から新たに記録媒体９０を再生する方法であって、第１面９０５（記録面）に付与され、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を第１面９０５（記録面）から除去する第１ステップと、情報記録材料が除去された第１面９０５（記録面）の少なくとも一部に、セルロース繊維を含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（繊維含有層）を形成する第２ステップと、を有する。 The recording medium reproduction method is a method of newly reproducing the recording medium 90 from the recording medium 90 having the first surface 905 (recording surface) on which information is recorded, and is given to the first surface 905 (recording surface). The first step of removing the information recording material used for recording information from the first surface 905 (recording surface), and at least a part of the first surface 905 (recording surface) from which the information recording material has been removed include cellulose. A second step of forming an ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer) composed of a fiber-containing material containing fibers.
　また、記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、情報が記録された第１面９０５（記録面）を有する記録媒体９０から新たに記録媒体９０を再生する装置であって、第１面９０５（記録面）に付与され、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を第１面９０５（記録面）から除去する材料除去部１２と、情報記録材料が除去された記録面の少なくとも一部に、セルロース繊維を含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（繊維含有層）を形成するインク受容層形成部１３（繊維含有層形成部）と、を備える。この記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、記録媒体の再生方法を実行することができる装置となっている。 The recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A is an apparatus for newly reproducing the recording medium 90 from the recording medium 90 having the first surface 905 (recording surface) on which information is recorded, and the first surface 905 (recording surface). The material removing unit 12 that removes the information recording material that is provided and used for recording information from the first surface 905 (recording surface), and at least a part of the recording surface from which the information recording material is removed include cellulose fibers. An ink receiving layer forming part 13 (fiber containing layer forming part) for forming an ink receiving layer 902 (fiber containing layer) made of a fiber containing material. This recording medium playback apparatus 1A is an apparatus that can execute a recording medium playback method.
　このような発明によれば、情報が記録され、不要となった記録媒体９０’は、その情報が抹消され、さらに再度の情報の記録が可能な記録媒体９０として再生される。また、この再生を繰り返し行なうことができる。 According to such an invention, the recording medium 90 'that has been recorded and no longer needed is reproduced as a recording medium 90 on which the information is erased and information can be recorded again. Further, this reproduction can be repeated.
　記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（記録層）を基材９０１に形成する層形成ステップと、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理ステップと、インク受容層９０２（記録層）を固化する固化ステップと、を有する。 A recording medium manufacturing method includes a layer forming step of forming an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate 901, and an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). ) And a solidifying step for solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer).
　また、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（記録層）を基材９０１に形成するインク受容層形成部１３（記録層形成部）と、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面性状を整える処理を行なう表面性状処理部１４（処理部）と、インク受容層９０２（記録層）を固化するインク受容層固化部１５（固化部）と、を備える。この記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、記録媒体の製造方法を実行することができる装置となっている。 In addition, the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B includes an ink receiving layer forming unit 13 (recording layer forming) that forms an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) made of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a substrate 901. Part), a surface property processing unit 14 (processing unit) that performs a process for adjusting the surface property of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), and an ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 (solidifying) that solidifies the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). Part). This recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is an apparatus capable of executing a recording medium manufacturing method.
　また、記録媒体の再生方法は、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を基材から除去する除去ステップと、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（記録層）を基材９０１に形成する層形成ステップと、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面性状を整える処理を行なう処理ステップと、インク受容層９０２（記録層）を固化する固化ステップと、有する。 Further, the recording medium reproduction method includes a removal step of removing an information recording material provided for information recording from a base material, and an ink receiving layer 902 composed of a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material ( A recording layer) on the substrate 901, a processing step for adjusting the surface properties of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), a solidifying step for solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), Have.
　また、記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、情報の記録に供された情報記録材料を基材から除去する材料除去部１２と、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料で構成されたインク受容層９０２（記録層）を基材９０１に形成するインク受容層形成部１３（記録層形成部）と、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面性状を整える処理を行なう表面性状処理部１４（処理部）と、表面性状処理部１４（処理部）によって処理されたインク受容層９０２を固化するインク受容層固化部１５（固化部）と、を備える。 In addition, the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A includes an ink receiving layer that includes a material removing unit 12 that removes an information recording material used for recording information from a base material, and a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material. An ink receiving layer forming portion 13 (recording layer forming portion) for forming 902 (recording layer) on the substrate 901, and a surface property processing portion 14 (processing portion) for performing processing for adjusting the surface properties of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). ) And an ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 (solidifying unit) that solidifies the ink receiving layer 902 processed by the surface texture processing unit 14 (processing unit).
　このような発明によれば、後述するような記録媒体９０を製造することができる。この記録媒体９０は、インク受容層９０２が例えばインクジェット方式での印刷が良好に行なわれるものとなっている。また、インク受容層９０２に印刷が施された記録媒体９０は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、印刷済みの記録媒体９０’は、インク受容層９０２が除去され、その後新たなインク受容層９０２が形成される。このように、印刷済みの記録媒体９０’は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体９０として再生される（製造される）。 According to such an invention, a recording medium 90 as described later can be manufactured. In this recording medium 90, the ink receiving layer 902 is favorably printed by, for example, an ink jet method. Further, the recording medium 90 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is printed may be unnecessary. In this case, the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the printed recording medium 90 ', and then a new ink receiving layer 902 is formed. In this way, the printed recording medium 90 ′ is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium 90 that can be printed again.
　図１に示す記録媒体再生システム１００は、記録媒体再生装置１Ａと、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂと、制御部１１とを備えている。この記録媒体再生システム１００を用いることにより、一例として、図３に示す記録媒体９０を製造することができる。記録媒体９０は、シート状の基材９０１と、基材９０１上に形成されたインク受容層９０２と、を有している。そして、未使用状態の記録媒体９０のインク受容層９０２に印刷を施して使用することができる。この印刷により、インク受容層９０２には、各種情報が記録されることとなる。各種情報には、例えば、文字、記号、図形、模様、色彩またはこれらの組み合わせ等が含まれる。また、後述するマーキング部（シンボル）９０４も記録することができる。 1 includes a recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B, and a control unit 11. By using this recording medium reproduction system 100, for example, the recording medium 90 shown in FIG. 3 can be manufactured. The recording medium 90 includes a sheet-like base material 901 and an ink receiving layer 902 formed on the base material 901. The ink receiving layer 902 of the unused recording medium 90 can be printed and used. By this printing, various information is recorded in the ink receiving layer 902. The various information includes, for example, characters, symbols, figures, patterns, colors, or combinations thereof. Also, a marking part (symbol) 904 described later can be recorded.
　また、印刷が施されて使用済みとなった記録媒体９０（以下この記録媒体９０を「記録媒体９０’」と言う）が例えば不要となった場合には、記録媒体９０’は、古紙として再利用される。この再利用にも記録媒体再生システム１００を用いることができる。この場合、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２を除去して基材９０１を得る。そして、基材９０１上にインク受容層９０２を再度形成することにより、使用状態の記録媒体９０が再生される。 In addition, when the recording medium 90 that has been printed and used (hereinafter, this recording medium 90 is referred to as “recording medium 90 ′”) becomes unnecessary, the recording medium 90 ′ is re-used as waste paper. Used. The recording medium reproduction system 100 can also be used for this reuse. In this case, the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the recording medium 90 ′ to obtain a base material 901. Then, by forming the ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 again, the used recording medium 90 is reproduced.
　なお、記録媒体９０’は、本実施形態では使用済みとなった記録媒体９０であるが、これに限定されず、例えば、一般的に市販されているＰＰＣ（Plain Paper Copier）用紙に直に印刷が施されて使用済みとなったものであってもよい。このような記録媒体９０’を再利用するには、記録媒体再生システム１００によって、少なくとも印刷された部分をＰＰＣ用紙から除去すれば、ＰＰＣ用紙が基材９０１として得られる。なお、ＰＰＣ用紙に対する印刷は、インクによるもの、トナーによるもの等、その態様は問わない。 Note that the recording medium 90 ′ is the recording medium 90 that has been used in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, the recording medium 90 ′ is printed directly on commercially available PPC (Plain Paper Copier) paper. It may have been used after being applied. In order to reuse such a recording medium 90 ′, PPC paper can be obtained as the base material 901 by removing at least the printed portion from the PPC paper by the recording medium reproduction system 100. It should be noted that printing on the PPC paper may be performed in any manner such as ink or toner.
　記録媒体再生システム１００では、使用済みの記録媒体９０（記録媒体９０’）を「１次記録媒体」と言い、１次記録媒体から得られた未使用の記録媒体９０を「２次記録媒体」と言うことができる。 In the recording medium reproduction system 100, the used recording medium 90 (recording medium 90 ′) is referred to as a “primary recording medium”, and an unused recording medium 90 obtained from the primary recording medium is referred to as a “secondary recording medium”. Can be said.
　まず、記録媒体再生システム１００の各部の構成について説明する前に、記録媒体９０について説明する。 First, before describing the configuration of each part of the recording medium playback system 100, the recording medium 90 will be described.
　図３および図４に示すように、記録媒体９０は、基材９０１と、インク受容層９０２と、を有している。 3 and 4, the recording medium 90 includes a base material 901 and an ink receiving layer 902.
　基材９０１は、例えば、ＰＰＣ用紙である。なお、基材９０１は、古紙を解繊して製造されたリサイクルペーパーであってもよいし、ＯＨＰ（Over Head Projector）に用いるＯＨＰシート（トレンスペアレンシ）であってもよい。基材９０１は、このように可撓性を有するものであるが、これに限定されず、剛体であってもよい。また、図３に示す構成では、基材９０１の平面視での形状（基材９０１の厚さ方向からみた形状）は、長方形であるが、これに限定されない。基材９０１が平面視で長方形の場合、そのサイズとしては、特に限定されず、例えば、Ａ判サイズであってもよいし、Ｂ判サイズであってもよい。 The base material 901 is, for example, PPC paper. In addition, the base material 901 may be a recycled paper manufactured by defibrating waste paper, or may be an OHP sheet (trend spareness) used for an OHP (Over Head Projector). The base material 901 is flexible as described above, but is not limited thereto, and may be a rigid body. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, the shape of the base material 901 in plan view (the shape seen from the thickness direction of the base material 901) is a rectangle, but is not limited to this. When the base material 901 is rectangular in plan view, the size is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, A size or B size.
　基材９０１は、平面視で、基材９０１の縁部の少なくとも一部に、インク受容層９０２が設けられていない余白部９０３を有している。図３に示す構成では、余白部９０３は、基材９０１の縁部の全周にわたって帯状に設けられている。このような余白部９０３が設けられていることにより、例えば記録媒体９０を再利用する際に、インク受容層９０２を除去する場合、余白部９０３からインク受容層９０２を容易に除去することができる。 The base material 901 has a blank portion 903 where the ink receiving layer 902 is not provided at least at a part of the edge of the base material 901 in plan view. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, the blank portion 903 is provided in a strip shape over the entire circumference of the edge portion of the base material 901. By providing such a blank portion 903, for example, when the ink receiving layer 902 is removed when the recording medium 90 is reused, the ink receiving layer 902 can be easily removed from the blank portion 903. .
　なお、余白部９０３の幅は、例えば、１ｍｍ以上１０ｍｍ以下が好ましく、３ｍｍ以上７ｍｍ以下がより好ましい。余白部９０３の幅が前記下限値以上であれば、余白部９０３からインク受容層９０２を容易に除去することができる。また、余白部９０３の幅が前記上限値以下であれば、基材９０１上でのインク受容層９０２の面積を、印刷可能な程度に十分に確保することができる。なお、余白部９０３は、基材９０１の縁部の全周にわたって設けられているが、これに限定されず、基材９０１の縁部の一部に設けられていてもよい。 In addition, the width of the blank portion 903 is, for example, preferably from 1 mm to 10 mm, and more preferably from 3 mm to 7 mm. If the width of the blank portion 903 is equal to or greater than the lower limit value, the ink receiving layer 902 can be easily removed from the blank portion 903. Further, if the width of the blank portion 903 is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the area of the ink receiving layer 902 on the base material 901 can be sufficiently ensured to be printable. In addition, although the blank part 903 is provided over the perimeter of the edge part of the base material 901, it is not limited to this, You may be provided in a part of edge part of the base material 901.
　基材９０１上には、インク受容層９０２が設けられている。インク受容層９０２は、図４に示す構成では基材９０１の一方側の面（図４中の上側の第１面９０５）に設けられているが、これに限定されず、基材９０１の他方側の面（図４中の下側の第２面９０６）にも設けられていてもよい。また、インク受容層９０２の平面視での形状は、長方形であるが、これに限定されない。 An ink receiving layer 902 is provided on the substrate 901. In the configuration shown in FIG. 4, the ink receiving layer 902 is provided on one surface of the base material 901 (the upper first surface 905 in FIG. 4). It may also be provided on the side surface (lower second surface 906 in FIG. 4). Further, the shape of the ink receiving layer 902 in plan view is a rectangle, but is not limited thereto.
　インク受容層９０２は、インクジェット方式によって（例えばインクジェットプリンターによって）印刷される部分であり、セルロース繊維と、セルロース繊維の少なくとも一部を被覆している疎水性材料とを含む複合体（繊維含有材料）で構成された繊維含有層である。このような繊維含有層がインクを受容するインク受容層９０２であることにより、インク受容層９０２は、インクジェットプリンターの印刷ヘッドから吐出されたインクを容易に受容し浸透させることができる。その結果、インク受容層９０２に印刷が施されることとなる。前述したように、インク受容層９０２には、印刷によって例えば文字等の各種情報が記録される。そして、インク受容層９０２の構成材料である複合体は、情報の記憶に供される材料であるため、「情報記録材料」と言うこともできる。 The ink receiving layer 902 is a portion that is printed by an inkjet method (for example, by an inkjet printer), and is a composite (fiber-containing material) that includes cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material that covers at least part of the cellulose fibers. It is the fiber content layer comprised by these. Since such a fiber-containing layer is an ink receiving layer 902 that receives ink, the ink receiving layer 902 can easily receive and infiltrate ink ejected from the print head of the ink jet printer. As a result, the ink receiving layer 902 is printed. As described above, various kinds of information such as characters are recorded on the ink receiving layer 902 by printing. The composite that is the constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 is a material that is used for storing information, and can also be referred to as an “information recording material”.
　インク受容層９０２の厚さは、例えば、２０μｍ以上１００μｍ以下が好ましく、３０μｍ以上７０μｍ以下がより好ましい。インク受容層９０２の厚さが下限値以上であれば、インクジェットプリンターによって吐出されたインクがインク受容層９０２の下側の基材９０１にまで浸透することを抑制することができる。また、インク受容層９０２の厚さが前記上限値以下であれば、記録媒体９０の製造コストを抑えることができる。なお、例えば、インク受容層９０２の厚さを５０μｍよりも厚くした場合には、インク受容層９０２でのインクの吸収性および保持性がより優れた記録媒体９０を得ることができる。 The thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, preferably 20 μm to 100 μm, and more preferably 30 μm to 70 μm. If the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is equal to or greater than the lower limit, it is possible to suppress the ink ejected by the ink jet printer from penetrating to the base material 901 below the ink receiving layer 902. Further, if the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90 can be suppressed. For example, when the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 is greater than 50 μm, it is possible to obtain a recording medium 90 that is more excellent in ink absorbability and retention in the ink receiving layer 902.
　図３に示すように、インク受容層９０２は、マーキング部（シンボル）９０４を含んでいる（有する）。このマーキング部９０４は、インク受容層９０２（繊維含有層）に関する情報を含んでいる。また、マーキング部９０４は、図３に示す構成では平面視で長方形をなすインク受容層９０２の１つの角部近傍に１つ設けられているが、配置箇所や配置数はこれに限定されない。 As shown in FIG. 3, the ink receiving layer 902 includes (has) a marking portion (symbol) 904. The marking unit 904 includes information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer). Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 3, one marking portion 904 is provided in the vicinity of one corner of the ink receiving layer 902 that is rectangular in plan view, but the arrangement location and the number of arrangement are not limited to this.
　マーキング部９０４は、バーコード（１次元バーコード）であってもよいが、ＱＲコード（登録商標）（２次元コード）（「ＱＲコード」は登録商標）であるのがより好ましい。マーキング部９０４がＱＲコードである場合、マーキング部９０４は、比較的多くの情報を担持することができる。なお、マーキング部９０４は、バーコードやＱＲコードの他に、例えば、単純な図形、記号、文字、またはこれらを組み合わせたものであってもよい。 The marking unit 904 may be a barcode (one-dimensional barcode), but is preferably a QR code (registered trademark) (two-dimensional code) (“QR code” is a registered trademark). When the marking unit 904 is a QR code, the marking unit 904 can carry a relatively large amount of information. Note that the marking unit 904 may be, for example, a simple figure, symbol, character, or a combination of these in addition to the barcode or QR code.
　インク受容層９０２に関する情報としては、特に限定されず、例えば、以下の情報が挙げられる。
　・第１面９０５に対するインク受容層９０２の位置情報。
　・第１面９０５に対するインク受容層９０２の面積情報。
　・インク受容層９０２の厚さ情報。
　・インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体の組成の情報（例えばセルロース繊維と樹脂との比）。 The information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following information.
Position information of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the first surface 905.
Area information of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the first surface 905.
Ink receiving layer 902 thickness information.
Information on the composition of the composite that forms the ink receiving layer 902 (for example, the ratio of cellulose fiber to resin).
　例えば前述したように基材９０１からインク受容層９０２を除去する際に、マーキング部９０４から、インク受容層９０２の厚さの情報や余白部９０３の位置と幅の情報を取得することにより、インク受容層９０２の除去を容易に行うことができる。また、インク受容層９０２に対してインクジェットプリンターによって印刷する際に、マーキング部９０４から、インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体の組成の情報を取得することにより、インク受容層９０２はどのような画像が印刷されるのに適しているか（例えば、写真の印刷に適しているのか、文字の印刷に適しているのか）を知ることができる。 For example, when the ink receiving layer 902 is removed from the substrate 901 as described above, the ink receiving layer 902 thickness information and the margin portion 903 position and width information are acquired from the marking unit 904 to obtain ink. The receiving layer 902 can be easily removed. In addition, when the ink receiving layer 902 is printed by an ink jet printer, information on the composition of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 is acquired from the marking unit 904, so that the image of the ink receiving layer 902 can be obtained. Is suitable for printing (for example, whether it is suitable for printing a photograph or printing a character).
　インク受容層９０２は、セルロース繊維と、セルロース繊維の少なくとも一部を被覆している疎水性材料とを含む複合体（繊維含有材料）で構成されている。インク受容層９０２は、後述するように、電子写真方式に類する方式による静電塗布（静電力を利用した塗布）により、複合体を基材９０１に付着させて、加圧加熱されることにより形成される。セルロース繊維は、セルロースによって構成されている繊維である。セルロース繊維は、天然繊維であってもよいし、再生繊維であってもよいし、半合成繊維であってもよい。言い換えると、セルロース繊維は、例えば、バージンパルプ由来のものであってもよいし、紙等（古紙、再生紙等を含む）のセルロース製品由来のものであってもよいし、上記のようなセルロースを含む材料に対し化学処理を施すことにより得られた半合成繊維であってもよい。疎水性材料がセルロース繊維を被覆する前の状態において、セルロース繊維は、粉体状の繊維であってもよい。 The ink receiving layer 902 is composed of a composite (fiber-containing material) including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material covering at least a part of the cellulose fibers. As will be described later, the ink receiving layer 902 is formed by adhering the composite to the base material 901 by electrostatic coating (coating using electrostatic force) by a method similar to the electrophotographic method, and pressurizing and heating. Is done. Cellulose fibers are fibers composed of cellulose. The cellulose fiber may be a natural fiber, a regenerated fiber, or a semi-synthetic fiber. In other words, for example, the cellulose fiber may be derived from virgin pulp, may be derived from a cellulose product such as paper (including waste paper, recycled paper, etc.), or cellulose as described above. Semi-synthetic fibers obtained by subjecting a material containing to chemical treatment may also be used. In the state before the hydrophobic material covers the cellulose fibers, the cellulose fibers may be powder fibers.
　なお、本発明において、セルロース繊維とは、化合物としてのセルロース（狭義のセルロース）を主成分とし繊維状をなすものであればよく、セルロース（狭義のセルロース）の他に、ヘミセルロース、リグニンを含むものであってもよい。 In the present invention, the cellulose fiber is not particularly limited as long as it is mainly composed of cellulose (narrowly defined cellulose) as a compound and has a fibrous form, and includes hemicellulose and lignin in addition to cellulose (narrowly defined cellulose). It may be.
　インク受容層９０２に含まれるセルロース繊維の大きさは、例えば、平均（個数平均）で長さ（長径）が１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下、幅（短径）が１μｍ以上３０μｍ以下であるのが好ましく、長さが５μｍ以上３０μｍ以下、幅が５μｍ以上２０μｍ以下であるのがより好ましい。セルロース繊維の長さを前記下限値より小さくした場合には、セルロース繊維の製造コストが高くなってしまうが、上記の範囲であれば製造コストを抑えることができる。さらに、セルロース繊維の大きさが前記数値範囲内であれば、セルロース繊維の長さを乾式方式で調整することができる。セルロース繊維の長さが前記上限値以下であれば、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体からなる粉体の帯電量の分布の均一性を向上させることができ、よって、複合体を基材９０１に均一に静電塗布することができる。 The size of the cellulose fibers contained in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably, for example, an average (number average) length (major axis) of 1 μm to 100 μm and a width (minor axis) of 1 μm to 30 μm. More preferably, the thickness is 5 μm or more and 30 μm or less, and the width is 5 μm or more and 20 μm or less. When the length of the cellulose fiber is made smaller than the lower limit value, the production cost of the cellulose fiber becomes high. However, the production cost can be suppressed within the above range. Furthermore, if the magnitude | size of a cellulose fiber is in the said numerical range, the length of a cellulose fiber can be adjusted with a dry system. If the length of a cellulose fiber is below the said upper limit, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles. Thereby, the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901.
　なお、セルロース繊維の大きさ（長さ、幅）は、例えば、マルバーン社（Malvern Instruments）製の粒子画像分析装置モフォロギＧ３（Morphologi G3）を用いて測定される。この装置は、自動乾式分散ユニットにより試料を均一に分散させ、該試料の静止画像を解析することにより、粒度および粒子形状を測定する装置である。 In addition, the magnitude | size (length, width) of a cellulose fiber is measured using the particle | grain image analyzer Morphologi G3 (Morphologi G3) made from Malvern (Instruments), for example. This apparatus is an apparatus for measuring particle size and particle shape by uniformly dispersing a sample by an automatic dry dispersion unit and analyzing a still image of the sample.
　インク受容層９０２を構成する繊維含有材料には、疎水性材料が含まれており、その疎水性材料がセルロース繊維の少なくとも一部を被覆している。そして、このインク受容層９０２に含まれるセルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、３未満であるのが好ましく、２以下であるのがより好ましい。セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比が３未満であれば、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体からなる粉体の帯電量の分布の均一性を向上させることができ、よって、複合体を基材９０１に均一に静電塗布させることができる。また、セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比を２以下とすることにより、インク受容層９０２を、印刷時にインクが浸透するのにより適した多孔質にすることができる。このように、特に、インク受容層９０２においてインクの吸収性を高くすることができる。なお、セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、例えば、粒子画像分析装置モフォロギＧ３で測定されたセルロース繊維の平均長さを平均幅で割った値である。 The fiber-containing material constituting the ink receiving layer 902 includes a hydrophobic material, and the hydrophobic material covers at least a part of the cellulose fiber. The average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers contained in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably less than 3, and more preferably 2 or less. If the average aspect-ratio of a cellulose fiber is less than 3, it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles. Thereby, the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901. Moreover, by setting the average aspect ratio of the cellulose fiber to 2 or less, the ink receiving layer 902 can be made more suitable for the ink to permeate during printing. In this way, in particular, the ink absorbability of the ink receiving layer 902 can be increased. The average aspect ratio of the cellulose fiber is, for example, a value obtained by dividing the average length of the cellulose fiber measured by the particle image analyzer Morphogi G3 by the average width.
　なお、セルロース繊維の平均長さは、１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下であるのが好ましい。これにより、記録媒体９０では、乾式方式でセルロース繊維の長さを小さくすることができ、かつ、セルロース繊維同士が絡み合うことを抑制することができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体からなる粉体の帯電量の分布の均一性を向上させることができ、よって、複合体を基材９０１に均一に静電塗布することができる。 In addition, it is preferable that the average length of a cellulose fiber is 1 micrometer or more and 100 micrometers or less. Thereby, in the recording medium 90, the length of a cellulose fiber can be made small by a dry system, and it can suppress that a cellulose fiber entangles. Thereby, the uniformity of the charge amount distribution of the powder made of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 can be improved, and thus the composite can be uniformly electrostatically applied to the substrate 901.
　疎水性材料は、例えば、加熱処理によりセルロース繊維に融着されて、複合体を形成する。疎水性材料は、セルロース繊維の表面の一部を被覆していてもよいし、セルロース繊維の表面全面を被覆していてもよい。なお、疎水性材料は、全体としてセルロースよりも疎水性の高いものであればよく、例えば、セルロースよりも疎水性の低い成分（親水性の高い成分）を含んでいてもよい。 The hydrophobic material is fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment, for example, to form a composite. The hydrophobic material may cover a part of the surface of the cellulose fiber or may cover the entire surface of the cellulose fiber. In addition, the hydrophobic material should just be a thing with hydrophobicity higher than a cellulose as a whole, for example, may contain the component (hydrophilic component with a low hydrophobicity) rather than a cellulose.
　疎水性材料は、セルロース繊維同士を結着させて、多孔質のインク受容層９０２を形成する。また、疎水性を有することにより、インク受容層９０２の疎水性、親水性のバランスを調整することができ、インク受容層９０２にインクを付与した際のインクの過度な濡れ広がりや弾き等を抑制し、インク受容層９０２におけるインクの吸収性を優れたものとすることができる。さらに、疎水性材料は、セルロース繊維を被覆することにより、複合体の帯電特性の安定性を優れたものとすることができる。これにより、静電塗布によりインク受容層９０２を好適に形成することができる。例えば、疎水性材料が被覆されていないセルロース繊維では、環境（具体的には湿度）によって帯電性が変化しやすく、静電塗布によりインク受容層９０２を形成することが困難な場合がある。また、疎水性材料が被覆されていないセルロース繊維では、インクとの親和性が高く、インクが滲んでしまう場合がある。疎水性材料をセルロースに被覆させることにより、セルロース繊維の帯電性を安定させることができ、インクの滲みを抑えることができる。 The hydrophobic material binds cellulose fibers together to form a porous ink receiving layer 902. Also, by having hydrophobicity, the balance between hydrophobicity and hydrophilicity of the ink receiving layer 902 can be adjusted, and excessive wetting and spreading of the ink when ink is applied to the ink receiving layer 902 is suppressed. In addition, the ink absorbability in the ink receiving layer 902 can be made excellent. Furthermore, the hydrophobic material can make the charging property of the composite excellent in stability by coating the cellulose fiber. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be suitably formed by electrostatic coating. For example, in a cellulose fiber that is not coated with a hydrophobic material, the chargeability is likely to change depending on the environment (specifically, humidity), and it may be difficult to form the ink receiving layer 902 by electrostatic coating. In addition, cellulose fibers that are not coated with a hydrophobic material have high affinity with ink, and the ink may ooze. By covering the hydrophobic material with cellulose, the chargeability of the cellulose fiber can be stabilized, and ink bleeding can be suppressed.
　疎水性材料は、少なくとも樹脂を含む。樹脂は、セルロース繊維同士を結着させて、多孔質のインク受容層９０２を形成する。セルロース繊維を被覆する前の状態において、樹脂は、粉体状のものであってもよい。なお、インク受容層９０２中の樹脂の含有量は、１０質量％以上４０質量％未満であるのが好ましく、１５質量％以上３０質量％以下であるのがより好ましい。 The hydrophobic material contains at least a resin. The resin binds cellulose fibers together to form a porous ink receiving layer 902. In the state before coating the cellulose fiber, the resin may be in powder form. The content of the resin in the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 10% by mass or more and less than 40% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less.
　疎水性材料は、セルロース繊維同士を結着させる機能を有するとともに、セルロース繊維を被覆することにより、複合体の帯電特性を安定化させる機能も有している。また、疎水性材料は、概ね後述するような樹脂で構成されている。この樹脂は、正帯電性のものであってもよいし、負帯電性のものであってもよいが、負帯電性のものであるのが好ましい。負帯電性の樹脂は、一般に、帯電特性の安定性が特に優れている。また、負帯電性の樹脂は、正帯電性の樹脂に加えて、種類が豊富で、樹脂の特性（例えば、融点、ガラス転移温度、セルロース繊維との接合強度、帯電量、疎水性の程度等）の調整を容易に行うことができるとともに、記録媒体９０の製造コストの抑制等の観点からも有利である。 The hydrophobic material has a function of binding cellulose fibers together, and also has a function of stabilizing the charging characteristics of the composite by covering the cellulose fibers. The hydrophobic material is generally composed of a resin as described later. This resin may be positively charged or negatively charged, but is preferably negatively charged. In general, negatively chargeable resins are particularly excellent in stability of charging characteristics. In addition to the positively chargeable resin, there are many types of negatively chargeable resins, and the characteristics of the resin (for example, melting point, glass transition temperature, bonding strength with cellulose fiber, charge amount, degree of hydrophobicity, etc.) ) Can be easily adjusted, and is advantageous from the viewpoint of reducing the manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90.
　疎水性材料を構成する樹脂としては、例えば、熱可塑性樹脂、硬化性樹脂等を用いることができるが、熱可塑性樹脂を用いるのが好ましい。特に、疎水性材料が熱可塑性樹脂を含むものであると、一般に、より安定した帯電特性（特に、負帯電性）が得られる。なお、疎水性材料が硬化性樹脂を含むものであると、記録媒体９０の耐熱性、耐久性等を特に優れたものとすることができる。よって、疎水性材料としては、熱可塑性樹脂を単独で含むものの他、熱可塑性樹脂と硬化性樹脂とを含むものでもよい。 As the resin constituting the hydrophobic material, for example, a thermoplastic resin, a curable resin, or the like can be used, but it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. In particular, if the hydrophobic material contains a thermoplastic resin, generally more stable charging characteristics (particularly negative chargeability) can be obtained. If the hydrophobic material contains a curable resin, the heat resistance and durability of the recording medium 90 can be made particularly excellent. Accordingly, the hydrophobic material may include a thermoplastic resin and a curable resin in addition to the thermoplastic resin alone.
　熱可塑性樹脂としては、例えば、ＡＳ樹脂、ＡＢＳ樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、エチレン－酢酸ビニル共重合体（ＥＶＡ）等のポリオレフィン、変性ポリオレフィン、ポリメチルメタクリレート等のアクリル樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリスチレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート等のポリエステル、ナイロン６、ナイロン４６、ナイロン６６、ナイロン６１０、ナイロン６１２、ナイロン１１、ナイロン１２、ナイロン６－１２、ナイロン６－６６等のポリアミド（ナイロン）、ポリフェニレンエーテル、ポリアセタール、ポリエーテル、ポリフェニレンオキシド、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン、ポリカーボネート、ポリフェニレンサルファイド、熱可塑性ポリイミド、ポリエーテルイミド、芳香族ポリエステル等の液晶ポリマー、スチレン系、ポリオレフィン系、ポリ塩化ビニル系、ポリウレタン系、ポリエステル系、ポリアミド系、ポリブタジエン系、トランスポリイソプレン系、フッ素ゴム系、塩素化ポリエチレン系等の各種熱可塑性エラストマー等が挙げられ、これらから選択される１種または２種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。好ましくは、熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリエステルまたはこれを含むものを用いる。 Examples of the thermoplastic resin include AS resin, ABS resin, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyolefin such as ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), modified polyolefin, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, and polyethylene. Polyester such as terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, nylon 6, nylon 46, nylon 66, nylon 610, nylon 612, nylon 11, nylon 12, nylon 6-12, nylon 6-66, polyamide (nylon), polyphenylene ether, polyacetal , Polyether, polyphenylene oxide, polyether ether ketone, polycarbonate, polyphenylene sulfide, thermoplastic polyimide, polyetherimide, aromatic Liquid crystal polymers such as reesters, various thermoplastic elastomers such as styrene, polyolefin, polyvinyl chloride, polyurethane, polyester, polyamide, polybutadiene, trans polyisoprene, fluororubber, chlorinated polyethylene, etc. 1 type selected from these, or 2 or more types can be used in combination. Preferably, as the thermoplastic resin, polyester or one containing the same is used.
　熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度（Ｔｇ）は、例えば、５０℃以上２００℃以下であるのが好ましく、５５℃以上１６０℃以下であるのがより好ましい。熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度が前記下限値以上であれば、摩擦程度の加熱でインク受容層９０２が剥がれることを抑制することができ、インク受容層９０２の強度が低下することを抑制することができる。熱可塑性樹脂のガラス転移温度が前記上限値以下であれば、例えばインク受容層９０２となる複合体を加熱加圧して固着させる際に、記録媒体９０を前記上限値よりも高い温度まで加熱する必要がなく、セルロース繊維が熱によりダメージを受けることを抑制することができる。また、前述したようにインク受容層９０２を剥離する場合にも、インク受容層９０２を加熱により軟化させることができ、その際、記録媒体９０を前記上限値よりも高い温度まで加熱する必要がない。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the thermoplastic resin is preferably, for example, 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 55 ° C. or higher and 160 ° C. or lower. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or higher than the lower limit, it is possible to suppress the ink receiving layer 902 from being peeled off by heating to the extent of friction, and to suppress the strength of the ink receiving layer 902 from being lowered. it can. If the glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, for example, when the composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902 is heated and pressed to be fixed, the recording medium 90 needs to be heated to a temperature higher than the upper limit value. It is possible to prevent the cellulose fibers from being damaged by heat. Further, as described above, also when the ink receiving layer 902 is peeled off, the ink receiving layer 902 can be softened by heating, and at that time, it is not necessary to heat the recording medium 90 to a temperature higher than the upper limit value. .
　硬化性樹脂としては、例えば、熱硬化性樹脂、光硬化性樹脂等が挙げられ、より具体的には、フェノール樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ユリア樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、アルキド樹脂、ウレタン樹脂（ポリウレタン）、アクリル樹脂等が挙げられ、これらから選択される１種または２種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Examples of the curable resin include a thermosetting resin, a photocurable resin, and the like. More specifically, a phenol resin, an epoxy resin, a melamine resin, a urea resin, an unsaturated polyester resin, an alkyd resin, and a urethane resin. (Polyurethane), an acrylic resin, etc. are mentioned, It can use combining 1 type (s) or 2 or more types selected from these.
　インク受容層９０２（繊維含有層）中の樹脂（熱可塑性樹脂）の含有量をＷａとしたとき、Ｗａは、１０質量％以上４０質量％未満であるのが好ましく、１５質量％以上３０質量％以下であるのがより好ましい。含有量Ｗａが前記下限値以上であれば、セルロース繊維の結着力を確保することができ、セルロース繊維がインク受容層９０２から脱落することを抑制することができる。含有量Ｗａが前記上限値未満であれば、インク受容層９０２の疎水性が高くなりすぎてインクを弾いてしまうことを抑制することができ、印刷品質を向上させることができる。複合体が基材９０１に付着される前の状態であっても、複合体が基材９０１に付着されてインク受容層９０２を形成している状態であっても、含有量Ｗａは、前記数値範囲内であることが好ましい。 When the content of the resin (thermoplastic resin) in the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer) is Wa, Wa is preferably 10% by mass or more and less than 40% by mass, and 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass. The following is more preferable. If content Wa is more than the said lower limit, the binding force of a cellulose fiber can be ensured and it can suppress that a cellulose fiber falls from the ink receiving layer 902. If the content Wa is less than the above upper limit value, it is possible to suppress the ink receiving layer 902 from becoming too hydrophobic and repel the ink, and the print quality can be improved. Whether the composite is attached to the base material 901 or the composite is attached to the base material 901 to form the ink receiving layer 902, the content Wa is the above numerical value. It is preferable to be within the range.
　疎水性材料は、帯電制御剤（電荷制御剤）を含むものであってもよい。これにより、インク受容層９０２となる複合体は、安定した帯電性、より大きな帯電性を有することができる。なお、複合体が帯電制御剤を含んでいるか否かは、複合体の帯電量の変化の他、複合体の安息角の減少によっても確認することができる。帯電制御剤は、複合体が凝集することを抑制する凝集抑制剤としての機能を有していてもよい。疎水性材料中において、帯電制御剤は、通常、少なくともその一部が、前述した樹脂の表面に露出している。これにより、帯電制御剤を含むことによる効果がより効果的に発揮される。 The hydrophobic material may contain a charge control agent (charge control agent). Thereby, the composite used as the ink receiving layer 902 can have stable chargeability and greater chargeability. Whether or not the composite contains a charge control agent can be confirmed not only by a change in the charge amount of the composite but also by a decrease in the angle of repose of the composite. The charge control agent may have a function as an aggregation inhibitor that suppresses aggregation of the complex. In the hydrophobic material, at least a part of the charge control agent is usually exposed on the surface of the resin. Thereby, the effect by including a charge control agent is exhibited more effectively.
　帯電制御剤としては、例えば、シリカ（二酸化珪素）、酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化セリウム、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ジルコニウム、チタン酸ストロンチウム、チタン酸バリウム、炭酸カルシウム、安息香酸の金属塩、サリチル酸の金属塩、アルキルサリチル酸の金属塩、カテコールの金属塩、含金属ビスアゾ染料、ニグロシン染料、テトラフェニルボレート誘導体、第四級アンモニウム塩、アルキルピリジニウム塩、塩素化ポリエステル、ニトロフニン酸等が挙げられ、これらから選択される１種または２種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Examples of the charge control agent include silica (silicon dioxide), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, cerium oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, calcium carbonate, metal salt of benzoic acid, and salicylic acid. Metal salts, alkylsalicylic acid metal salts, catechol metal salts, metal-containing bisazo dyes, nigrosine dyes, tetraphenylborate derivatives, quaternary ammonium salts, alkylpyridinium salts, chlorinated polyesters, nitrofunnic acid, etc. One or two or more selected from can be used in combination.
　また、帯電制御剤は、例えば、帯電特性の調整、疎水性の調整等を目的とする表面処理が施されたものであってもよい。帯電制御剤の表面処理には、例えば、シラン化合物を用いることができる。これにより、帯電制御剤に対して好適に疎水処理することができる。帯電制御剤の疎水処理に用いられるシラン化合物としては、例えば、トリメチルシラン、ジメチルシラン、トリエチルシラン、トリイソプロピルシラン、トリイソブチルシラン等のアルキルシラン類、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン等のシランカップリング剤等が挙げられる。 The charge control agent may be subjected to surface treatment for the purpose of adjusting charging characteristics, adjusting hydrophobicity, and the like. For the surface treatment of the charge control agent, for example, a silane compound can be used. Thereby, a hydrophobic treatment can be suitably performed on the charge control agent. Examples of the silane compound used for the hydrophobic treatment of the charge control agent include alkylsilanes such as trimethylsilane, dimethylsilane, triethylsilane, triisopropylsilane, and triisobutylsilane, and silanes such as vinyltrimethoxysilane and vinyltriethoxysilane. A coupling agent etc. are mentioned.
　帯電制御剤の形態は、特に限定されないが、粒子状（微粒子状）をなすものであるのが好ましい。帯電制御剤の体積基準の平均粒子径（体積平均粒子径）は、例えば、１ｎｍ以上１００ｎｍ以下であるのが好ましく、５ｎｍ以上５０ｎｍ以下であるのがより好ましい。帯電制御剤の粒子径が前記数値範囲内であれば、より良好な帯電効果を得ることができる。さらに、帯電制御剤の粒子径が前記数値範囲内であれば、樹脂の表面により良好にコーティングを行なうことができる。なお、帯電制御剤の体積平均粒子径は、例えば、レーザー回折・散乱法や、動的光散乱法等により求めることができる。 The form of the charge control agent is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the form of particles (fine particles). The volume-based average particle diameter (volume average particle diameter) of the charge control agent is, for example, preferably from 1 nm to 100 nm, and more preferably from 5 nm to 50 nm. If the particle size of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, a better charging effect can be obtained. Furthermore, when the particle size of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, coating can be performed more favorably on the resin surface. The volume average particle diameter of the charge control agent can be determined by, for example, a laser diffraction / scattering method or a dynamic light scattering method.
　帯電制御剤の含有量は、セルロース繊維および樹脂の混合物１００質量部に対して、例えば、０．５質量部以上１０質量部以下であるのが好ましく、１質量部以上５質量部以下であるのがより好ましい。帯電制御剤の含有量の範囲が前記数値範囲内であれば、インク受容層９０２となる複合体は、より良好で安定した帯電性を発揮することができる。 The content of the charge control agent is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, and preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose fiber and resin mixture. Is more preferable. If the range of the content of the charge control agent is within the above numerical range, the composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902 can exhibit better and more stable chargeability.
　疎水性材料は、白色顔料を含むものであってもよい。これにより、インク受容層９０２の白色度を好適に調整することができる。例えば、白色顔料によって、白色度が低い基材９０１に対しても、あるいは白色度の低いセルロース繊維を用いた場合でも、白色度の高いインク受容層９０２を形成することができ、印刷の見栄え（品質）を向上させることができる。 The hydrophobic material may contain a white pigment. Thereby, the whiteness of the ink receiving layer 902 can be adjusted suitably. For example, the white pigment can form the ink receiving layer 902 with high whiteness even when the low-whiteness base material 901 or cellulose fibers with low whiteness is used, and the appearance of printing ( Quality).
　白色顔料の材料としては、例えば、炭酸カルシウム、二酸化チタン、硫酸バリウム、リトポン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化珪素、三酸化アンチモン、燐酸チタニウム、酸化亜鉛、鉛白、酸化ジルコニウム等の無機顔料やポリスチレン、スチレン－ジビニルベンゼン共重合体等の有機微粉末等が挙げられ、これらから選択される１種または２種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。好ましくは、白色顔料としては、二酸化チタンや炭酸カルシウムを用いる。 Examples of the white pigment material include inorganic pigments such as calcium carbonate, titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, lithopone, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, antimony trioxide, titanium phosphate, zinc oxide, white lead, zirconium oxide, polystyrene, styrene- Examples thereof include organic fine powders such as divinylbenzene copolymer, and one or two or more selected from these can be used in combination. Preferably, titanium dioxide or calcium carbonate is used as the white pigment.
　白色顔料の配合量としては、例えば、樹脂９０質量部に対して、１質量部以上３０質量部以下であるのが好ましく、３質量部以上２０質量部以下であるのがより好ましい。これにより、記録媒体９０の製造コストの上昇を抑制しつつ、インク受容層９０２の白色度をより好適に高めることができる。白色顔料は、樹脂の表面、内部のいずれに配されていてもよい。 The blending amount of the white pigment is, for example, preferably from 1 part by mass to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably from 3 parts by mass to 20 parts by mass with respect to 90 parts by mass of the resin. Thereby, it is possible to more suitably increase the whiteness of the ink receiving layer 902 while suppressing an increase in manufacturing cost of the recording medium 90. The white pigment may be arranged either on the surface or inside of the resin.
　例えば、ポリエステル９０質量部に対して、白色顔料である炭酸カルシウムを１０質量部だけホッパー内で混合した後、二軸混練押出機に投入し溶融混練して白色の樹脂ペレットを製造した場合、この樹脂ペレットから形成されるインク受容層９０２は、より白色度の高いものとなる。 For example, when 90 parts by weight of polyester is mixed with 10 parts by weight of calcium carbonate, which is a white pigment, in a hopper and then charged into a twin-screw kneading extruder and melt-kneaded to produce white resin pellets. The ink receiving layer 902 formed from resin pellets has higher whiteness.
　疎水性材料は、上記以外の成分を含むものであってもよい。例えば、疎水性材料は、白色顔料以外の顔料や染料を含んでもよい。この場合、静電塗布により、色紙を簡単に低コストで得ることができる。 The hydrophobic material may include components other than those described above. For example, the hydrophobic material may include pigments and dyes other than white pigments. In this case, colored paper can be easily obtained at low cost by electrostatic coating.
　また、インク受容層９０２を形成する複合体の平均帯電量の絶対値は、３μＣ／ｇ以上であるのが好ましい。複合体の平均帯電量の絶対値が高い方が、静電塗布により、容易に複合体を基材９０１に付着させてインク受容層９０２を形成することができる。なお、複合体の帯電量は、複合体同士を摩擦帯電させて測定することができる。帯電量の測定は、例えば、標準キャリアと称する粉体と複合体とを空気中で撹拌（混合）し、その粉体の帯電量を測定することにより行うことができる。標準キャリアとしては、例えば、日本画像学会から購入可能（正帯電極性または負帯電極性トナー用標準キャリア、「Ｐ－０１またはＮ－０１」として入手可能）な、フェライトコアを表面処理した球形キャリアで、正帯電極性トナー用または負帯電極性トナー用の標準キャリア、パウダーテック株式会社から入手可能なフェライトキャリア等を用いることができる。より具体的には、複合体の平均帯電量は、例えば、次のようにして求めることができる。上記キャリアを８０質量％、および複合体を２０質量％の混合粉体を、アクリル製の容器に投入し、６０秒間１００ｒｐｍで容器をボールミル架台に載せて容器を回転させ、キャリアと複合体（粉体）との混合を行う。混合を行った複合体とキャリアとの混合物について吸引式小型帯電量測定装置（例えば、トレック社製「Model210Hs-2」）により測定することで、平均帯電量の絶対値を求めることができる。 The absolute value of the average charge amount of the composite forming the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 3 μC / g or more. When the absolute value of the average charge amount of the composite is higher, the composite can be easily attached to the substrate 901 by electrostatic coating, and the ink receiving layer 902 can be formed. The charge amount of the composite can be measured by friction charging the composites. The charge amount can be measured, for example, by stirring (mixing) a powder called a standard carrier and a composite in the air and measuring the charge amount of the powder. As a standard carrier, for example, a spherical carrier with a ferrite core surface-treated, which can be purchased from the Imaging Society of Japan (standard carrier for positively charged or negatively charged polarity toner, available as “P-01 or N-01”). Standard carriers for positively charged polarity toners or negatively charged polarity toners, ferrite carriers available from Powder Tech Co., etc. can be used. More specifically, the average charge amount of the composite can be determined, for example, as follows. The mixed powder of 80% by mass of the carrier and 20% by mass of the composite is put into an acrylic container, and the container is placed on a ball mill frame at 100 rpm for 60 seconds, and the container is rotated. Body). The absolute value of the average charge amount can be obtained by measuring the mixed composite and carrier mixture with a suction-type small charge amount measuring device (for example, “Model 210Hs-2” manufactured by Trek).
　例えば、平均長さ（長径）が１８μｍ、平均幅（短径）が９μｍのセルロース繊維と、ポリエステル樹脂（ガラス転移温度：５６℃、分子量：１００００）で構成され、粒径が１μｍ～４０μｍの粉体とを、２：８（重量比）で空気中で混合した後、加熱処理によってポリエステル樹脂をセルロース繊維に融着させて複合化した。次いで、この複合化したものに、表面が疎水化処理された二酸化珪素微粒子を重量比で１．５％になるように加えて、卓上ブレンダーに投入し、翼端速度３０ｍ／ｓで６０秒間攪拌処理した。なお、疎水化処理した無機微粒子の効果は、安息角の減少および帯電量の変化により確認することができる。通常、セルロース繊維は、比較的正帯電し易い材料であるが、ポリエステル樹脂と複合化し、この複合体を無機微粒子でコーティングすることにより負帯電し易くなる。この場合、平均帯電量は、－６μＣ／ｇとなる。 For example, a powder composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 μm and an average width (minor axis) of 9 μm and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000) and having a particle diameter of 1 μm to 40 μm. The body was mixed in air at a ratio of 2: 8 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment to form a composite. Next, silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed. In addition, the effect of the hydrophobized inorganic fine particles can be confirmed by a decrease in the angle of repose and a change in charge amount. Usually, cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles. In this case, the average charge amount is −6 μC / g.
　次に、記録媒体再生システム１００の各部の構成について説明する。前述したように、記録媒体再生システム１００は、記録媒体再生装置１Ａと、制御部１１と、マーキング部形成部２０と、を備えている（図１参照）。また、記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、材料除去部１２と、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂと、を有している。 Next, the configuration of each part of the recording medium playback system 100 will be described. As described above, the recording medium reproduction system 100 includes the recording medium reproduction apparatus 1A, the control unit 11, and the marking unit forming unit 20 (see FIG. 1). Further, the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A includes a material removing unit 12 and a recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B.
　図２に示すように、記録媒体再生システム１００は、ステップＳ１０１～ステップＳ１０４を順に実行することができる。ステップＳ１０１は、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２（インク受容層９０２を構成する材料）を除去して、基材９０１を得る材料除去ステップ（除去ステップ）である。ステップＳ１０２は、ステップＳ１０１で得られた基材９０１上に、未固化のインク受容層９０２を形成する層形成ステップである。ステップＳ１０３は、基材９０１上に形成された未固化のインク受容層９０２の表面性状を整える表面性状正常化処理（以下この処理を単に「表面性状処理」と言う）を行なう処理ステップである。ステップＳ１０４は、表面性状処理が施された未固化のインク受容層９０２を固化する固化ステップである。なお、記録媒体再生システム１００では、ステップＳ１０１を「第１ステップ」と言い、その後のステップＳ１０２からステップＳ１０４まで、すなわち、基材９０１上に印刷が可能な程度のインク受容層９０２が形成されるまでを「第２ステップ」と言う。 As shown in FIG. 2, the recording medium playback system 100 can execute step S101 to step S104 in order. Step S101 is a material removal step (removal step) for removing the ink receiving layer 902 (the material constituting the ink receiving layer 902) from the recording medium 90 'to obtain the substrate 901. Step S102 is a layer forming step for forming an unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 obtained in step S101. Step S103 is a processing step of performing a surface texture normalization process (hereinafter, this process is simply referred to as “surface texture process”) for adjusting the surface texture of the unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 formed on the substrate 901. Step S104 is a solidification step for solidifying the unsolidified ink receiving layer 902 that has been subjected to the surface texture treatment. Note that in the recording medium reproduction system 100, step S101 is referred to as “first step”, and the subsequent step S102 to step S104, that is, the ink receiving layer 902 that can be printed on the substrate 901 is formed. This is called the “second step”.
　記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、使用済みの記録媒体９０’から新たに記録媒体９０を再生する装置である。 The recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A is an apparatus that newly reproduces the recording medium 90 from the used recording medium 90 '.
　記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、記録媒体９０の再生において、記録媒体再生装置１Ａによってインク受容層９０２が除去された基材９０１に対して、インク受容層９０２の再形成を主に担う装置である。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is an apparatus mainly responsible for the re-formation of the ink receiving layer 902 with respect to the substrate 901 from which the ink receiving layer 902 has been removed by the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A.
　制御部１１は、記録媒体再生装置１Ａの各部やマーキング部形成部２０の作動を制御する制御装置である。この制御部１１は、ＣＰＵ（中央演算処理部）１１１と、記憶部１１２とを有している。記憶部１１２には、前記作動を制御する制御プログラムや各種データー等が記憶されている。記録媒体再生システム１００は、これらの制御プログラム等に基づいて、ステップＳ１０１～ステップＳ１０４を順に実行することができる。 The control unit 11 is a control device that controls the operation of each unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus 1A and the marking unit forming unit 20. The control unit 11 includes a CPU (central processing unit) 111 and a storage unit 112. The storage unit 112 stores a control program for controlling the operation, various data, and the like. The recording medium reproduction system 100 can execute step S101 to step S104 in order based on these control programs and the like.
　なお、図示はしないが、制御部１１は、例えば、キーボードやタッチパネル等のような入力部と、ＬＣＤモニター等のような画像表示部とを有しているのが好ましい。後述する各部の作動条件は、制御プログラムに予め入力されていてもよいし、入力部を介してその都度入力されてもよい。また、この入力情報は、画像表示部を介して確認することもできる。また、制御部１１には、入力部や画像表示部がそれぞれ接続される接続部が設けられていてもよい。 Although not shown, the control unit 11 preferably includes an input unit such as a keyboard and a touch panel, and an image display unit such as an LCD monitor. The operating conditions of each part to be described later may be input in advance to the control program, or may be input each time via the input part. This input information can also be confirmed via the image display unit. The control unit 11 may be provided with a connection unit to which an input unit and an image display unit are connected.
　図１に示すように、記録媒体再生装置１Ａは、材料除去部１２を備えている。材料除去部１２は、ステップＳ１０１を実行するものである。 As shown in FIG. 1, the recording medium playback apparatus 1 </ b> A includes a material removing unit 12. The material removing unit 12 executes Step S101.
　ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つで行なうのが好ましい。また、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去に、除去部材として、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを用いることができる。そして、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去を切削で行ない、その切削にバイト１２２を用いる。これにより、切削に適した工具を用いることができ、よって、その切削を容易かつ迅速に行なうことができる。 In step S101 (first step), removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is performed by at least one of cutting, scraping, grinding, and polishing. Is preferred. In step S101 (first step), at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material). In this embodiment, the fiber-containing material is removed by cutting, and the cutting tool 122 is used for the cutting. Thereby, a tool suitable for cutting can be used, and therefore the cutting can be performed easily and quickly.
　図５に示すように、材料除去部１２は、回転ドラム１２１と、バイト１２２と、ポンプ１２３とを有している。 As shown in FIG. 5, the material removing unit 12 includes a rotating drum 121, a cutting tool 122, and a pump 123.
　回転ドラム１２１は、その駆動源であるモーター（図示せず）によって、ｙ軸回りに矢印α１２１方向（時計回り）に回転することができる。回転ドラム１２１は、円筒体で構成され、その内腔部１２１ａがポンプ１２３と気密的に接続されている。また、回転ドラム１２１の壁部には、内腔部１２１ａと連通する貫通孔で構成された吸引孔１２１ｂが複数形成されている。これらの吸引孔１２１ｂは、回転ドラム１２１の周方向に沿って等間隔に配置されており、ｙ軸方向に沿っても間隔を置いて配置されている。そして、ポンプ１２３を作動させることにより、各吸引孔１２１ｂに吸引力Ｆ１２１が生じる。この吸引力Ｆ１２１により、回転ドラム１２１の外周部に記録媒体９０’を固定することができる。 The rotating drum 121 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow α121 (clockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a driving source. The rotating drum 121 is formed of a cylindrical body, and its inner cavity 121a is airtightly connected to the pump 123. In addition, a plurality of suction holes 121b each having a through hole communicating with the inner cavity 121a are formed in the wall portion of the rotary drum 121. These suction holes 121b are arranged at equal intervals along the circumferential direction of the rotary drum 121, and are also arranged at intervals even along the y-axis direction. Then, by operating the pump 123, a suction force F121 is generated in each suction hole 121b. With this suction force F121, the recording medium 90 'can be fixed to the outer peripheral portion of the rotary drum 121.
　なお、回転ドラム１２１は、吸引力Ｆ１２１によって記録媒体９０’を固定するよう構成されているが、これに限定されず、例えば、静電気力によって記録媒体９０’を固定するよう構成されていてもよい。このような構成としては、例えば、回転ドラム１２１の外表面に誘電体または電極を配置する構成等が挙げられる。 The rotating drum 121 is configured to fix the recording medium 90 ′ by the suction force F121, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to fix the recording medium 90 ′ by electrostatic force, for example. . Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which a dielectric or an electrode is disposed on the outer surface of the rotating drum 121.
　バイト１２２は、切削に用いられる工具である。このバイト１２２は、回転ドラム１２１に対してｘ軸方向正側に配置され、回転ドラム１２１の外周側から接近可能に支持されている。図５に示すように、記録媒体９０’を固定した回転ドラム１２１が回転した状態でバイト１２２を回転ドラム１２１に接近させることにより、例えば記録媒体９０’の余白部９０３からインク受容層９０２に対する切削を開始することができる。そして、この切削を継続することにより、インク受容層９０２を基材９０１から剥離することができる。これにより、例えばインク受容層９０２に機密情報が記録されている場合、この機密情報をその場で抹消することができる。また、インク受容層９０２が剥離された基材９０１は、回転ドラム１２１の回転停止後に、回転ドラム１２１から取り去られ、トレイ１７（図７参照）に回収される。なお、この回収は、自動的に行なわれてもよいし、手動で行なわれてもよい。また、剥離されたインク受容層９０２は、別途回収されるのが好ましい。 The cutting tool 122 is a tool used for cutting. The cutting tool 122 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotating drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 121. As shown in FIG. 5, for example, cutting of the ink receiving layer 902 from the blank portion 903 of the recording medium 90 ′ is performed by causing the cutting tool 122 to approach the rotating drum 121 while the rotating drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated. Can start. Then, by continuing this cutting, the ink receiving layer 902 can be peeled from the substrate 901. Thereby, for example, when confidential information is recorded in the ink receiving layer 902, the confidential information can be deleted on the spot. Further, the base material 901 from which the ink receiving layer 902 has been peeled is removed from the rotating drum 121 after the rotation of the rotating drum 121 is stopped, and is collected in the tray 17 (see FIG. 7). This collection may be performed automatically or manually. The peeled ink receiving layer 902 is preferably collected separately.
　なお、記録媒体９０’の余白部９０３からインク受容層９０２に対する切削を開始するには、まず、回転ドラム１２１が回転する間に、回転ドラム１２１上の記録媒体９０’の余白部９０３と、バイト１２２の刃先とを位置決めする。そして、この位置決め状態のまま回転ドラム１２１を回転させることにより、インク受容層９０２を余白部９０３から切削し始めることができる。この位置決め動作は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 In order to start cutting the ink receiving layer 902 from the blank portion 903 of the recording medium 90 ′, first, the blank portion 903 of the recording medium 90 ′ on the rotating drum 121 and the cutting tool are rotated while the rotating drum 121 rotates. The blade edge 122 is positioned. Then, by rotating the rotary drum 121 in this positioning state, it is possible to start cutting the ink receiving layer 902 from the blank portion 903. This positioning operation is controlled by the control unit 11.
　また、インク受容層９０２の剥離は、回転ドラム１２１が１回転する間に行なわれてもよいし、回転ドラム１２１が複数回転する間に行なわれてもよい。インク受容層９０２の剥離を回転ドラム１２１が複数回転する間に行なう場合、バイト１２２を回転ドラム１２１に対して徐々に接近させつつ、その剥離を行なう。これにより、インク受容層９０２が比較的厚いものであっても、無理なくその剥離を行なうことができる。 Further, the ink receiving layer 902 may be peeled off while the rotating drum 121 rotates once, or may be performed while the rotating drum 121 rotates a plurality of times. When the ink receiving layer 902 is peeled while the rotating drum 121 rotates a plurality of times, the cutting is performed while gradually moving the cutting tool 122 closer to the rotating drum 121. Accordingly, even if the ink receiving layer 902 is relatively thick, it can be peeled off without difficulty.
　また、バイト１２２の刃先と回転ドラム１２１の外周面との最大接近距離を規制するストッパーが設けられているのが好ましい。このストッパーにより、バイト１２２による除去限界を規制する、すなわち、バイト１２２の刃先と回転ドラム１２１の外周面との距離が例えば基材９０１の厚さよりも小さくなるのを防止することができる。これにより、バイト１２２の刃先が基材９０１内に進入して過剰に切削してしまうのを防止することができる。 In addition, it is preferable that a stopper for restricting the maximum approach distance between the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 121 is provided. By this stopper, the removal limit by the cutting tool 122 is restricted, that is, the distance between the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 121 can be prevented from becoming smaller than the thickness of the base material 901, for example. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting edge of the cutting tool 122 from entering the base material 901 and excessive cutting.
　また、回転ドラム１２１を回転させるモーターの回転数を変更することにより、バイト１２２の切削速度を調整することができる。
　モーターの回転数の変更は、モーターに印加する電圧を変更することにより可能である。 In addition, the cutting speed of the cutting tool 122 can be adjusted by changing the rotational speed of the motor that rotates the rotating drum 121.
The rotation speed of the motor can be changed by changing the voltage applied to the motor.
　以上のような構成の材料除去部１２は、回転ドラム１２１の回転、バイト１２２の移動、ポンプ１２３の作動等が制御部１１によって制御されている。 In the material removing unit 12 configured as described above, the rotation of the rotary drum 121, the movement of the cutting tool 122, the operation of the pump 123, and the like are controlled by the control unit 11.
　図６に示すように、本実施形態では、材料除去部１２は、バイト１２２を３つ有している。これらのバイト１２２は、ｙ軸方向に沿って配置されており、連結部１２４を介して互いに転結されている。インク受容層９０２を切削、除去する際には、これらのバイト１２２を連結部１２４ごと一括して矢印α１２２方向（ｙ軸方向）に往復動させる。これにより、インク受容層９０２の除去を迅速に行なうことができる。また、インク受容層９０２のｙ軸方向の幅の大小に応じて、バイト１２２の往復距離、すなわち、矢印α１２２方向の振れ幅を調整することもできる。 As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the material removing unit 12 has three cutting tools 122. These cutting tools 122 are arranged along the y-axis direction and are connected to each other via a connecting portion 124. When cutting and removing the ink receiving layer 902, these cutting tools 122 are moved together in the arrow α122 direction (y-axis direction) together with the connecting portion 124. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed quickly. Further, the reciprocating distance of the cutting tool 122, that is, the deflection width in the direction of the arrow α122, can be adjusted according to the width of the ink receiving layer 902 in the y-axis direction.
　図７に示すように、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、搬送部１６と、インク受容層形成部１３と、を備えている。また、図８に示すように、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、これらの他に、表面性状処理部（処理部）１４と、インク受容層固化部（固化部）１５とをさらに備えている。 As shown in FIG. 7, the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1 </ b> B includes a transport unit 16 and an ink receiving layer forming unit 13. As shown in FIG. 8, the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1 </ b> B further includes a surface property processing unit (processing unit) 14 and an ink receiving layer solidifying unit (solidifying unit) 15 in addition to these.
　搬送部１６は、インク受容層９０２が形成される以前の基材９０１、または、インク受容層９０２が形成された基材９０１（記録媒体９０）を搬送するものである。搬送部１６は、搬送ベルト１６１と、搬送ローラー１６２と、を有している。 The transport unit 16 transports the base material 901 before the ink receiving layer 902 is formed or the base material 901 (recording medium 90) on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed. The transport unit 16 includes a transport belt 161 and a transport roller 162.
　搬送ベルト１６１は、例えば無端ベルトで構成されており、基材９０１を載置したままｘ軸方向正側に向かって搬送することができる。なお、搬送ベルト１６１の構成材料としては、例えば、ステンレス鋼等のような金属材料を用いるのが好ましい。また、金属材料の他にも、例えば、ポリイミド等のような耐熱性を有する樹脂材料を用いることもできる。また、搬送ベルト１６１は、基材９０１を単に載置したまま搬送するものであってもよいし、搬送ベルト１６１の表面が粘着性を有し、この粘着により基材９０１を保持して搬送するものであってもよい。 The conveyance belt 161 is constituted by, for example, an endless belt, and can convey toward the positive side in the x-axis direction while the base material 901 is placed. In addition, as a constituent material of the conveyance belt 161, it is preferable to use metal materials, such as stainless steel, for example. In addition to the metal material, for example, a heat-resistant resin material such as polyimide can be used. Further, the transport belt 161 may transport the base material 901 while it is simply placed, or the surface of the transport belt 161 has adhesiveness, and the base material 901 is held and transported by this adhesive. It may be a thing.
　なお、搬送ベルト１６１に代えて、基材９０１を搬送するものとしては、例えば、基材９０１を負圧により吸着保持する構成のもの（プラテン）であってもよい。 In addition, instead of the conveyance belt 161, the substrate 901 may be conveyed (platen) configured to adsorb and hold the substrate 901 with a negative pressure, for example.
　また、図７に示すように、搬送ベルト１６１には、インク受容層９０２が形成される以前の基材９０１が、トレイ１７から供給される。この供給は、自動的に行なわれてもよいし、手動で行なわれてもよい。また、搬送ベルト１６１には、基材９０１を１枚ごとに（毎葉に）供給するのが好ましい。また、インク受容層９０２が形成された基材９０１は、その搬送方向下流側で搬送ベルト１６１から別途回収される。この回収も、自動的に行なわれてもよいし、手動で行なわれてもよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the base material 901 before the ink receiving layer 902 is formed is supplied from the tray 17 to the transport belt 161. This supply may be performed automatically or manually. Moreover, it is preferable to supply the base material 901 to the conveyance belt 161 one by one (each leaf). Further, the base material 901 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed is separately collected from the transport belt 161 on the downstream side in the transport direction. This collection may also be performed automatically or manually.
　搬送ベルト１６１は、基材９０１の搬送に耐え得る程度の十分な強度を有し、無端ベルトとして機能する程度の十分な柔軟性を有するのが好ましい。また、特に、搬送ベルト１６１は、後述する転写ニップ１３５を通過するときに感光体１３１と転写部１３４との電位差を十分に保持し得るものが好ましい。 The conveying belt 161 preferably has sufficient strength to withstand the conveyance of the base material 901 and has sufficient flexibility to function as an endless belt. In particular, it is preferable that the conveyance belt 161 can sufficiently hold the potential difference between the photosensitive member 131 and the transfer unit 134 when passing through a transfer nip 135 described later.
　搬送ローラー１６２は、２つの搬送ローラー１６２が搬送ベルト１６１を介して上下で１組となって、搬送ベルト１６１の延在方向に沿って間隔を置いて配置されている。そして、各搬送ローラー１６２がそれぞれ矢印α１６２方向に回転することにより、搬送ベルト１６１上に載置された基材９０１を搬送することができる。なお、搬送部１６は、基材９０１を搬送する搬送速度を変更可能に構成されている。この変更方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、主動ローラーとなっている搬送ローラー１６２に接続されるモーターに対して印加する電圧を調整する方法、主動ローラーとモーターとの間に減速機を設ける方法等が挙げられる。また、主動ローラーとしては、搬送ベルト１６１の上側に位置する搬送ローラー１６２よりも、搬送ベルト１６１の下側に位置する搬送ローラー１６２とするのが好ましい。 The transport rollers 162 are arranged such that two transport rollers 162 are paired up and down via the transport belt 161 and are spaced along the direction in which the transport belt 161 extends. And each base roller 901 mounted on the conveyance belt 161 can be conveyed because each conveyance roller 162 rotates to the direction of arrow (alpha) 162, respectively. In addition, the conveyance part 16 is comprised so that change of the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is possible. This changing method is not particularly limited. For example, a method of adjusting a voltage applied to a motor connected to the conveyance roller 162 serving as a main driving roller, a speed reducer is provided between the main driving roller and the motor. Methods and the like. The main driving roller is preferably a conveyance roller 162 positioned below the conveyance belt 161 rather than the conveyance roller 162 positioned above the conveyance belt 161.
　図７に示すように、基材９０１の搬送方向の途中には、インク受容層形成部１３が配置されている。インク受容層形成部１３は、ステップＳ１０２を実行する、すなわち、繊維含有材料（インク受容層９０２となる複合体）でインク受容層９０２（記録層）を基材９０１に形成する層形成ステップを実行する記録層形成部である。インク受容層形成部１３は、感光体１３１と、帯電部１３２と、露光部１３３と、転写部１３４と、材料供給部２と、を有し、静電塗布により、基材９０１にインク受容層９０２を形成する装置である。 As shown in FIG. 7, the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 is arranged in the middle of the transport direction of the base material 901. The ink receiving layer forming unit 13 executes Step S102, that is, executes a layer forming step of forming the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) on the substrate 901 with the fiber-containing material (composite that becomes the ink receiving layer 902). A recording layer forming unit. The ink receiving layer forming unit 13 includes a photosensitive member 131, a charging unit 132, an exposure unit 133, a transfer unit 134, and a material supply unit 2. The ink receiving layer is formed on the substrate 901 by electrostatic coating. This is an apparatus for forming 902.
　感光体１３１は、搬送ベルト１６１の上側に配置され、その外周面１３１ａに繊維含有材料を担持して、この繊維含有材料を基材９０１に転写させる担持体である。このような担持体としての感光体１３１は、回転体である、すなわち、円筒状をなすもので構成されている。また、感光体１３１は、モーターに接続され、矢印α１３１方向（反時計回り）に回転することができる。これにより、感光体１３１は、基材９０１の搬送に伴って矢印α１３１方向に回転しつつ、基材９０１に繊維含有材料を安定して転写することができる。なお、感光体１３１は、その回転速度を変更可能に構成されている。この変更方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、感光体１３１に接続されるモーターに印加する電圧を変更することにより可能である。また、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａは、例えば、有機感光体によって形成されているのが好ましい。感光体１３１の回転は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 The photosensitive member 131 is a carrier that is disposed on the upper side of the conveyance belt 161 and carries a fiber-containing material on its outer peripheral surface 131a and transfers the fiber-containing material to the substrate 901. The photosensitive member 131 as such a carrier is a rotating member, that is, a cylindrical member. The photoconductor 131 is connected to a motor and can rotate in the direction of arrow α131 (counterclockwise). Thereby, the photoconductor 131 can stably transfer the fiber-containing material to the base material 901 while rotating in the direction of the arrow α131 as the base material 901 is conveyed. The photosensitive member 131 is configured to be able to change its rotation speed. The changing method is not particularly limited, and for example, it is possible to change the voltage applied to the motor connected to the photoconductor 131. The outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoconductor 131 is preferably formed of, for example, an organic photoconductor. The rotation of the photosensitive member 131 is controlled by the control unit 11.
　感光体１３１の外周側には、感光体１３１の矢印α１３１に沿って、帯電部１３２、露光部１３３、材料供給部２、および転写部１３４がこの順に配列されている。 A charging unit 132, an exposure unit 133, a material supply unit 2, and a transfer unit 134 are arranged in this order along the arrow α131 of the photoconductor 131 on the outer peripheral side of the photoconductor 131.
　帯電部１３２は、感光体１３１の回転に伴って矢印α１３２方向（時計回り）に回転しつつ、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａを一様に帯電させるローラーである。本実施形態では、帯電部１３２は、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａを、例えば負電位に帯電させることができる。なお、帯電部１３２としては、例えば、オゾンを照射するコロナ帯電器、帯電ブラシ、帯電フィルム等で構成することができる。また、この帯電部１３２の作動は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 The charging unit 132 is a roller that uniformly charges the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131 while rotating in the direction of the arrow α132 (clockwise) as the photosensitive member 131 rotates. In the present embodiment, the charging unit 132 can charge the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131 to, for example, a negative potential. The charging unit 132 can be configured by, for example, a corona charger that irradiates ozone, a charging brush, a charging film, or the like. The operation of the charging unit 132 is controlled by the control unit 11.
　露光部１３３は、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａを露光し、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａの電位を調整する。本実施形態では、露光部１３３は、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａにレーザー光ＬＢ１３３を照射し、繊維含有材料が感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａに移動付着するような電位に調整することができる。なお、電位の調整は、例えば、前記一様に帯電した感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａの一部を徐電することにより可能である。また、この露光部１３３の作動は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 The exposure unit 133 exposes the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131 and adjusts the potential of the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photosensitive member 131. In this embodiment, the exposure unit 133 can adjust the potential so that the fiber-containing material moves and adheres to the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photoconductor 131 by irradiating the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photoconductor 131 with the laser beam LB133. The potential can be adjusted, for example, by gradually charging a part of the outer peripheral surface 131a of the uniformly charged photoreceptor 131. The operation of the exposure unit 133 is controlled by the control unit 11.
　材料供給部２は、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａに移動付着させる。材料供給部２は、貯留部２１と、攪拌機（アジテーター）２２と、供給ローラー２３と、層形成ローラー２４と、ブレード２５と、を有している。また、この材料供給部２の作動も、制御部１１によって制御されている。 The material supply unit 2 moves and attaches the fiber-containing material to the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131. The material supply unit 2 includes a storage unit 21, an agitator 22, a supply roller 23, a layer forming roller 24, and a blade 25. The operation of the material supply unit 2 is also controlled by the control unit 11.
　貯留部２１は、粉体状の繊維含有材料を内部に貯留している。
　攪拌機２２は、貯留部２１内で矢印α２２方向（反時計回り）に回転することができる。これにより、貯留部２１内で繊維含有材料を攪拌し、帯電させることができる。この繊維含有材料は、矢印α２３方向（時計回り）に回転する供給ローラー２３を介して、層形成ローラー２４に供給される。 The storage unit 21 stores a powdery fiber-containing material therein.
The stirrer 22 can rotate in the direction of the arrow α22 (counterclockwise) in the storage unit 21. Thereby, the fiber-containing material can be stirred and charged in the storage unit 21. The fiber-containing material is supplied to the layer forming roller 24 via the supply roller 23 that rotates in the direction of the arrow α23 (clockwise).
　層形成ローラー２４は、供給ローラー２３を介して供給された繊維含有材料との間に電位差を有し、矢印α２４方向（時計回り）に回転しつつ、繊維含有材料が静電付着する。 The layer forming roller 24 has a potential difference with the fiber-containing material supplied via the supply roller 23, and the fiber-containing material is electrostatically attached while rotating in the direction of arrow α24 (clockwise).
　ブレード２５は、層形成ローラー２４上に付着した繊維含有材料の厚さ（付着量）を調整して薄膜化し、摩擦帯電させる。 The blade 25 adjusts the thickness (attachment amount) of the fiber-containing material attached on the layer forming roller 24 to form a thin film, which is triboelectrically charged.
　また、層形成ローラー２４上の繊維含有材料は、感光体１３１と層形成ローラー２４との間の電位差により、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａに移動付着する。なお、感光体１３１と層形成ローラー２４との電位は、適宜設定される。また、この電位の設定は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 Further, the fiber-containing material on the layer forming roller 24 moves and adheres to the outer peripheral surface 131 a of the photosensitive member 131 due to a potential difference between the photosensitive member 131 and the layer forming roller 24. Note that the potential between the photosensitive member 131 and the layer forming roller 24 is appropriately set. The setting of the potential is controlled by the control unit 11.
　転写部１３４は、搬送ベルト１６１に対して感光体１３１と反対側（図７中の下側）に配置され、感光体１３１との間で基材９０１を搬送ベルト１６１ごと挟持することができる。これにより、感光体１３１の外周面１３１ａに付着された繊維含有材料を基材９０１に転写することができる。この転写部１３４は、矢印α１３４方向（時計回り）に回転するアイドルローラーであり、感光体１３１との間で、空間である転写ニップ１３５を形成している。また、転写部１３４の外周面１３４ａは、所定の電位を有している。これにより、転写ニップ１３５では、感光体１３１と転写部１３４との間に電位差が生じ、よって、感光体１３１上の繊維含有材料が転写部１３４側に静電的に移動して、基材９０１に転写される。そして、転写された繊維含有材料は、基材９０１の移動に伴って層状に形成されて、インク受容層９０２となる。なお、転写部１３４は、搬送部１６の搬送ローラー１６２とともに搬送ベルト１６１を移動させる搬送ローラーとしての機能を有している。 The transfer unit 134 is disposed on the opposite side (lower side in FIG. 7) of the photosensitive member 131 with respect to the conveying belt 161, and can sandwich the substrate 901 together with the conveying belt 161 with the photosensitive member 131. As a result, the fiber-containing material attached to the outer peripheral surface 131a of the photoreceptor 131 can be transferred to the substrate 901. The transfer unit 134 is an idle roller that rotates in the direction of arrow α 134 (clockwise), and forms a transfer nip 135 that is a space with the photoreceptor 131. The outer peripheral surface 134a of the transfer unit 134 has a predetermined potential. Thereby, in the transfer nip 135, a potential difference is generated between the photoconductor 131 and the transfer portion 134, so that the fiber-containing material on the photoconductor 131 is electrostatically moved to the transfer portion 134 side, and the base material 901. Is transferred to. Then, the transferred fiber-containing material is formed into a layer shape with the movement of the base material 901 and becomes the ink receiving layer 902. The transfer unit 134 functions as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16.
　このように転写部１３４は、感光体１３１との間の電位差で生じる静電気力によって繊維含有材料を転写するものである。すなわち、第２ステップ（層形成ステップ）では、インク受容層９０２（繊維含有層（記録層））の形成を静電塗布により行なう。本実施形態では、静電気力を用いる（静電塗布）という簡単な方法で、繊維含有材料を基材９０１に容易かつ適正に付着させることができる。 As described above, the transfer unit 134 transfers the fiber-containing material by the electrostatic force generated by the potential difference with the photoreceptor 131. That is, in the second step (layer forming step), the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer (recording layer)) is formed by electrostatic coating. In the present embodiment, the fiber-containing material can be easily and appropriately attached to the base material 901 by a simple method using electrostatic force (electrostatic application).
　また、図７に示すように、転写部１３４は、感光体１３１（担持体）との間で基材９０１を搬送ベルト１６１ごと挟持して、繊維含有材料の転写を行なうよう構成されている。これにより、基材９０１への繊維含有材料の塗布を安定して行なうことができる。なお、転写部１３４上（転写ニップ１３５）では、感光体１３１による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは同じとなっている。 Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the transfer unit 134 is configured to transfer the fiber-containing material by sandwiching the substrate 901 together with the conveyance belt 161 with the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member). Thereby, application | coating of the fiber containing material to the base material 901 can be performed stably. On the transfer unit 134 (transfer nip 135), the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photoreceptor 131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are the same.
　インク受容層形成部１３に対して、基材９０１の搬送方向下流側、すなわち、ｘ軸方向正側には、表面性状処理部１４が配置されている。表面性状処理部１４は、ステップＳ１０３を実行するものである。 The surface property processing unit 14 is disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the ink receiving layer forming unit 13, that is, on the positive side in the x-axis direction. The surface texture processing unit 14 executes Step S103.
　ところで、インク受容層形成部１３で形成された直後のインク受容層９０２は、例えば筋ムラ等の各種のムラやうねり等（以下「筋ムラ」を代表する）が生じた状態となっている。このような状態は、その程度にもよるが、例えば、インク受容層９０２でのインクの受容を多少なりとも阻害する場合がある。そこで、ムラが生じたインク受容層９０２に対して表面性状を整える処理を行なう必要があり、この表面性状処理を表面性状処理部１４で行なう。本実施形態では、表面性状処理として、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａを均す均し処理と、インク受容層９０２を加圧する加圧処理と、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａを半固化する半固化処理とが含まれる。なお、インク受容層９０２にムラが生じる原因としては、例えば、インク受容層形成部１３を構成する部品同士の組み立て誤差（例えば層形成時や転写時の駆動歯車ピッチの誤差）によるもの、転写時の放電によるもの、転写後の搬送振動でインク受容層９０２が崩れたことによるもの等が挙げられる。 By the way, the ink receiving layer 902 immediately after being formed by the ink receiving layer forming portion 13 is in a state in which various types of unevenness such as unevenness in the stripes, undulations, etc. (hereinafter “represented by unevenness in the stripes”) are generated. Such a state depends on the degree, but for example, the ink reception in the ink receiving layer 902 may be somewhat inhibited. Therefore, it is necessary to perform a process for adjusting the surface texture on the ink receiving layer 902 where the unevenness has occurred, and the surface texture process is performed by the surface texture processing unit 14. In the present embodiment, as the surface texture treatment, a leveling treatment for leveling the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902, a pressure treatment for pressing the ink receiving layer 902, and a semi-solidification for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902. Processing. The cause of unevenness in the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, due to an assembly error between components constituting the ink receiving layer forming portion 13 (for example, an error in the driving gear pitch during layer formation or transfer), or during transfer. And the like due to the ink receiving layer 902 being broken by the transfer vibration after transfer.
　図８に示すように、表面性状処理部１４は、均し処理部３と、加圧処理部４と、半固化処理部５と、を有している。また、均し処理部３と、加圧処理部４と、半固化処理部５とは、基材９０１の搬送方向に沿ってこの順に配置されている。 As shown in FIG. 8, the surface texture treatment unit 14 includes a leveling treatment unit 3, a pressure treatment unit 4, and a semi-solidification treatment unit 5. Further, the leveling processing unit 3, the pressure processing unit 4, and the semi-solidification processing unit 5 are arranged in this order along the conveyance direction of the base material 901.
　前述したように、表面性状処理（処理）は、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面９０２ａを均して平坦化する、すなわち、平滑化する均し処理（平坦化処理）を含む。均し処理により、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａを平滑な状態とすることができる。 As described above, the surface texture treatment (treatment) includes a smoothing treatment (flattening treatment) that smoothes and flattens the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). By the leveling process, the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 can be made smooth.
　表面性状処理部１４では、均し処理を均し処理部３で行なう。図８、図９に示すように、均し処理部３は、均しローラー３１と、支持ローラー３２とを有している。 In the surface texture processing unit 14, the leveling processing is performed in the leveling processing unit 3. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the leveling unit 3 includes a leveling roller 31 and a support roller 32.
　均しローラー３１は、搬送ベルト１６１の上側に配置されている。この均しローラー３１は、その駆動源であるモーター（図示せず）によって、ｙ軸回りに矢印α３１方向（反時計回り）に回転することができる。また、均しローラー３１は、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａに接することができる。そして、図９に示すように、均しローラー３１は、表面９０２ａとの接点での接線方向の速度をＶ３１としたとき、Ｖ３１＜Ｖ１６なる関係を満足するよう回転が調整されている。これにより、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａは、ｘ軸方向正側に移動するのに従って、筋ムラを形成する微小な凹凸等が潰されるとともに、繊維含有材料が搬送方向ＣＤ１６の上流側に押し戻される。これにより、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａは、うねりや凹凸等が均されて減少し、平滑化（平坦化）される。なお、インク受容層９０２が平滑化されているときには、基材９０１は、搬送ベルト１６１に対して、例えば前述した粘着や、その他摩擦係合によって位置ズレが防止されている。また、インク受容層９０２から押し戻された材料は、別途回収されて、破棄されてもよいし、再利用されてもよい。また、均しローラー３１の回転は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 The leveling roller 31 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyor belt 161. The leveling roller 31 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow α31 (counterclockwise) around the y axis by a motor (not shown) as a driving source. Further, the leveling roller 31 can contact the surface 902 a of the ink receiving layer 902. As shown in FIG. 9, the leveling roller 31 is adjusted to rotate so as to satisfy the relationship of V31 <V16, where V31 is the tangential speed at the contact point with the surface 902a. As a result, as the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 moves to the positive side in the x-axis direction, minute irregularities and the like that form streaks are crushed and the fiber-containing material is pushed back upstream in the transport direction CD16. . As a result, the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 is smoothed (flattened), with undulations, irregularities and the like being reduced. When the ink receiving layer 902 is smoothed, the base material 901 is prevented from being displaced with respect to the transport belt 161 by, for example, the above-described adhesion or other frictional engagement. Further, the material pushed back from the ink receiving layer 902 may be separately collected and discarded, or may be reused. Further, the rotation of the leveling roller 31 is controlled by the control unit 11.
　なお、均しローラー３１の外周面は、例えば、ステンレス鋼等のような金属材料で構成されているのが好ましい。また、均しローラー３１の外周面の表面粗さ（中心線平均粗さＲａ）は、特に限定されないが、例えば、０．１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下であるのが好ましい。 In addition, it is preferable that the outer peripheral surface of the leveling roller 31 is made of a metal material such as stainless steel. Moreover, the surface roughness (centerline average roughness Ra) of the outer peripheral surface of the leveling roller 31 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 μm or more and 100 μm or less, for example.
　また、インク受容層９０２には、均しローラー３１との摩擦によって生じた静電気が帯びる。そこで、図８に示すように、均しローラー３１は、アース線３３を介して接地されている。これにより、均しローラー３１を除電することができ、よって、インク受容層９０２を構成する繊維含有材料の粉体が均しローラー３１に付着するのを防止することができる。このように表面性状処理部１４では、ステップＳ１０３（処理ステップ）中に、インク受容層９０２（記録層）に対して除電を行なうことができる。なお、インク受容層９０２（記録層）に対する除電は、ステップＳ１０３（処理ステップ）中に行なわれるのに限定されず、ステップＳ１０３（処理ステップ）とステップＳ１０４（固化ステップ）との間に行なわれてもよい。 In addition, the ink receiving layer 902 is charged with static electricity generated by friction with the leveling roller 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8, the leveling roller 31 is grounded via the ground wire 33. As a result, the leveling roller 31 can be neutralized, and therefore the fiber-containing material powder constituting the ink receiving layer 902 can be prevented from adhering to the leveling roller 31. As described above, the surface texture processing unit 14 can perform static elimination on the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) during step S103 (processing step). The neutralization of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) is not limited to being performed during step S103 (processing step), but is performed between step S103 (processing step) and step S104 (solidification step). Also good.
　支持ローラー３２は、搬送ベルト１６１に対して均しローラー３１と反対側に配置されている。この支持ローラー３２は、ｙ軸回りに矢印α３２方向（時計回り）に回転するアイドルローラーである。これにより、支持ローラー３２は、インク受容層９０２が形成された基材９０１を搬送ベルト１６１ごと下方から支持することができ、よって、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａに対する均し処理（平坦化処理）を十分に行なうことができる。なお、支持ローラー３２は、搬送部１６の搬送ローラー１６２とともに搬送ベルト１６１を移動させる搬送ローラーとしての機能を有している。 The support roller 32 is disposed on the side opposite to the leveling roller 31 with respect to the transport belt 161. This support roller 32 is an idle roller that rotates in the direction of arrow α32 (clockwise) around the y-axis. As a result, the support roller 32 can support the substrate 901 on which the ink receiving layer 902 is formed from the lower side together with the transport belt 161, and thus leveling processing (flattening processing) on the surface 902 a of the ink receiving layer 902. Can be performed sufficiently. The support roller 32 has a function as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16.
　このように、表面性状処理（処理）は、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面９０２ａを均して平坦化する均し処理（平坦化処理）と、インク受容層９０２（記録層）を加圧する加圧処理、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面９０２ａを半固化する半固化処理とを含んでいる。そして、ステップＳ１０３（処理ステップ）では、均し処理（平坦化処理）、加圧処理、半固化処理の順に表面性状処理（処理）を行なっている。特に、ステップＳ１０３の途中に加圧処理を含んでいることにより、インク受容層９０２に対する高密度化を好適に行なうことができる。 As described above, the surface texture treatment (treatment) is performed by adding a leveling treatment (flattening treatment) for leveling and flattening the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) and an ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). Pressurizing treatment for pressing, and semi-solidifying treatment for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). In step S103 (processing step), surface property processing (processing) is performed in the order of leveling processing (flattening processing), pressurizing processing, and semi-solidifying processing. In particular, by including a pressurizing process in the middle of step S103, it is possible to suitably increase the density of the ink receiving layer 902.
　表面性状処理部１４では、加圧処理を加圧処理部４で行なう。図８に示すように、加圧処理部４は、外周部４１１がステンレス鋼等のような金属材料で構成された２つの加圧ローラー４１を有するカレンダー機である。これら２つの加圧ローラー４１は、搬送ベルト１６１を介して上下に配置されており、矢印α４１方向に回転するアイドルローラーである。そして、２つの加圧ローラー４１の間をインク受容層９０２が通過する際に、インク受容層９０２に対して層厚が減少する方向に加圧することができる。これにより、加圧処理が施され、よって、インク受容層９０２内で繊維含有材料同士が結合する。また、加圧されたインク受容層９０２内では、繊維含有材料の密度が増加するとともに、その密度も均一化される。なお、２つの加圧ローラー４１がインク受容層９０２を加圧する力は、例えば、好ましくは１０ｋｇ以上２０００ｋｇ以下であり、より好ましくは４００ｋｇ以上８００ｋｇ以下である強加圧となっている。なお、インク受容層９０２に対する加圧は、本実施形態では１回であるが、これに限定されず、例えば複数回にわたって段階的に行なわれてもよい。また、２つの加圧ローラー４１のうちの下側の加圧ローラー４１は、搬送部１６の搬送ローラー１６２とともに搬送ベルト１６１を移動させる搬送ローラーとしての機能を有している。また、２つの加圧ローラー４１は、中心間距離が可変に構成されていてもよい。これにより、加圧力を調整することができる。この調整も、制御部１１によって制御される。 In the surface property processing unit 14, the pressurizing process is performed by the pressurizing unit 4. As shown in FIG. 8, the pressure processing unit 4 is a calendar machine having two pressure rollers 41 whose outer peripheral part 411 is made of a metal material such as stainless steel. These two pressure rollers 41 are arranged above and below the conveyor belt 161, and are idle rollers that rotate in the direction of arrow α41. When the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two pressure rollers 41, the ink receiving layer 902 can be pressed in a direction in which the layer thickness decreases. As a result, pressure treatment is performed, and thus the fiber-containing materials are bonded to each other in the ink receiving layer 902. Further, in the pressurized ink receiving layer 902, the density of the fiber-containing material is increased and the density is also made uniform. The force with which the two pressure rollers 41 press the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, a strong pressure of preferably 10 kg or more and 2000 kg or less, more preferably 400 kg or more and 800 kg or less. In addition, although pressurization with respect to the ink receiving layer 902 is once in this embodiment, it is not limited to this, For example, you may perform in steps over multiple times. The lower pressure roller 41 of the two pressure rollers 41 has a function as a conveyance roller that moves the conveyance belt 161 together with the conveyance roller 162 of the conveyance unit 16. Further, the two pressure rollers 41 may be configured such that the distance between the centers is variable. Thereby, a pressurizing force can be adjusted. This adjustment is also controlled by the control unit 11.
　前述したように、表面性状処理（処理）は、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面９０２ａを均して平坦化する均し処理（平坦化処理）と、インク受容層９０２を加圧する加圧処理と、さらに、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の表面９０２ａを半固化する半固化処理を含む。ステップＳ１０３（処理ステップ）では、均し処理（平坦化処理）、加圧処理、半固化処理の順に処理を行なう。このように半固化処理は、ステップＳ１０３の最後に行なわれ、インク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料の飛散防止やインク受容層９０２の形状維持等に寄与する。また、半固化処理は、インク受容層固化部１５での本固化に先立って、インク受容層９０２を仮固化する処理ともいうことができる。この仮固化により、インク受容層９０２の固化を促進することができる。 As described above, the surface property treatment (treatment) includes leveling treatment (flattening treatment) for leveling and flattening the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer), and pressurization for pressurizing the ink receiving layer 902. And a semi-solidification process for semi-solidifying the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer). In step S103 (processing step), the leveling process (flattening process), the pressurizing process, and the semi-solidifying process are performed in this order. As described above, the semi-solidification process is performed at the end of step S103, and contributes to prevention of scattering of the fiber-containing material, which is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902, and the shape maintenance of the ink receiving layer 902. The semi-solidification process can also be referred to as a process of temporarily solidifying the ink receiving layer 902 prior to the main solidification in the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15. By this temporary solidification, the solidification of the ink receiving layer 902 can be promoted.
　表面性状処理部１４では、半固化処理を半固化処理部５で行なう。図８に示すように、半固化処理部５は、チャンバー５１と、ヒーター５２とを有している。 In the surface property processing unit 14, the semi-solidification processing is performed in the semi-solidification processing unit 5. As shown in FIG. 8, the semi-solidification processing unit 5 includes a chamber 51 and a heater 52.
　チャンバー５１は、断熱材で構成された断熱壁５１１を有している。また、チャンバー５１は、入口５１２と、出口５１３とを有している。これにより、搬送ベルト１６１上の基材９０１がインク受容層９０２とともにチャンバー５１内を通過することができる。 The chamber 51 has a heat insulating wall 511 made of a heat insulating material. The chamber 51 has an inlet 512 and an outlet 513. Thereby, the base material 901 on the transport belt 161 can pass through the chamber 51 together with the ink receiving layer 902.
　ヒーター５２は、チャンバー５１内で搬送ベルト１６１の上側に配置されている。ヒーター５２は、通電により発熱する発熱体で構成されているのが好ましいが、その他、電磁波を発するもので構成されていてもよい。発熱体としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ニクロム線のような電熱線やハロゲンランプ等を用いることができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２は、チャンバー５１内を通過する間に上側から非接触で加熱される。この加熱より、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａ側では、熱可塑性樹脂が一旦溶融される。そして、インク受容層９０２がチャンバー５１内から出ると、前記溶融した熱可塑性樹脂は、例えば自然に冷却されて、結着し、固化する。この固化により、表面９０２ａには、インク受容層９０２の層厚に対して薄い膜が形成される。この膜化により、例えば、表面性状処理部１４の次に配置されたインク受容層固化部１５との接触で生じる静電気でインク受容層９０２から繊維含有材料が飛び散ったり、搬送による振動でインク受容層９０２の形状が崩れてしまったりするのを防止することができる。 The heater 52 is disposed above the transport belt 161 in the chamber 51. The heater 52 is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized, but may also be composed of something that emits electromagnetic waves. The heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire, a halogen lamp, or the like can be used. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 is heated in a non-contact manner from above while passing through the chamber 51. By this heating, the thermoplastic resin is once melted on the surface 902a side of the ink receiving layer 902. When the ink receiving layer 902 comes out of the chamber 51, the molten thermoplastic resin is naturally cooled, bound, and solidified, for example. By this solidification, a thin film is formed on the surface 902a with respect to the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902. By this film formation, for example, the fiber-containing material scatters from the ink receiving layer 902 due to static electricity generated by contact with the ink receiving layer solidified portion 15 disposed next to the surface texture processing portion 14, or the ink receiving layer due to vibration caused by conveyance. It is possible to prevent the shape of 902 from collapsing.
　なお、半固化処理部５での加熱温度は、例えば、熱可塑性樹脂の前記ガラス転移温度以上であり、熱可塑性樹脂の好ましくは融点以上である。この加熱温度は、制御部１１によって制御される。また、半固化処理部５での加熱時間は、例えば、チャンバー５１内をインク受容層９０２が移動する距離と、速度Ｖ１６との関係で求められる。 In addition, the heating temperature in the semi-solidification process part 5 is more than the said glass transition temperature of a thermoplastic resin, for example, Preferably it is more than melting | fusing point of a thermoplastic resin. The heating temperature is controlled by the control unit 11. Further, the heating time in the semi-solidification processing unit 5 is obtained, for example, by the relationship between the distance that the ink receiving layer 902 moves in the chamber 51 and the speed V16.
　また、半固化処理の前に、インク受容層９０２は、平坦化され、厚さが一定の状態となっている。これにより、半固化処理で表面９０２ａに形成される前記薄い膜も、平坦化された状態が維持される。 Also, before the semi-solidification process, the ink receiving layer 902 is flattened and has a constant thickness. Thereby, the thin film formed on the surface 902a by the semi-solidification process is also maintained in a flattened state.
　図８に示すように、表面性状処理部１４に対して、基材９０１の搬送方向下流側、すなわち、ｘ軸方向正側には、インク受容層固化部１５が配置されている。インク受容層固化部１５は、ステップＳ１０４を実行するものである。インク受容層固化部１５は、２つの固化ローラー１５１を有している。これら２つの固化ローラー１５１は、搬送ベルト１６１を介して上下に配置されており、矢印α１５１方向に回転する。また、各固化ローラー１５１には、それぞれ、ヒーター１５２が内蔵されている。ヒーター１５２は、通電により発熱する発熱体で構成されているのが好ましい。この発熱体としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ニクロム線のような電熱線等を用いることができる。そして、２つの固化ローラー１５１の間をインク受容層９０２が通過する際に、インク受容層９０２を加熱しつつ、インク受容層９０２に対して層厚が減少する方向に加圧することができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２内の熱可塑性樹脂を全体的に十分に溶融することができる。そして、インク受容層９０２が２つの固化ローラー１５１の間を通過した後は、前記溶融した熱可塑性樹脂は、例えば自然に冷却されて、結着し、固化する。これにより、過不足なく固化したインク受容層９０２が形成され、よって、インク受容層９０２を基材９０１に固着することができる。なお、２つの固化ローラー１５１がインク受容層９０２を加圧する力は、例えば、好ましくは１０ｋｇ以上２０００ｋｇ以下であり、より好ましくは４００ｋｇ以上８００ｋｇ以下である。また、インク受容層９０２を加熱する温度は、好ましくは１００℃以上２５０℃以下であり、より好ましくは１５０℃以上１８０℃以下である。なお、インク受容層９０２を加熱する温度は、前記数値範囲に限定されず、熱可塑性樹脂の種類に応じて、変更することもできる。この場合、熱可塑性樹脂が軟化または溶融するまで加熱するのが好ましい。 As shown in FIG. 8, the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 is disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the surface texture processing unit 14, that is, on the positive side in the x-axis direction. The ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 executes Step S104. The ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 has two solidifying rollers 151. These two solidification rollers 151 are arranged above and below via the conveyor belt 161 and rotate in the direction of the arrow α151. Each solidifying roller 151 has a built-in heater 152. The heater 152 is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized. The heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used. Then, when the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two solidifying rollers 151, the ink receiving layer 902 can be heated and pressed against the ink receiving layer 902 in a direction in which the layer thickness decreases. Thereby, the thermoplastic resin in the ink receiving layer 902 can be fully melted as a whole. Then, after the ink receiving layer 902 has passed between the two solidifying rollers 151, the molten thermoplastic resin is naturally cooled, bonded, and solidified, for example. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 solidified without excess or deficiency is formed, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be fixed to the base material 901. The force with which the two solidifying rollers 151 press the ink receiving layer 902 is, for example, preferably 10 kg to 2000 kg, and more preferably 400 kg to 800 kg. The temperature for heating the ink receiving layer 902 is preferably 100 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 150 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower. In addition, the temperature which heats the ink receiving layer 902 is not limited to the said numerical range, It can also change according to the kind of thermoplastic resin. In this case, it is preferable to heat until the thermoplastic resin is softened or melted.
　また、２つの固化ローラー１５１のうちの上側の固化ローラー１５１による加熱温度と、下側の固化ローラー１５１による加熱温度とは、同じであってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。また、下側の固化ローラー１５１は、ヒーター１５２が省略されたものであってもよい。下側の固化ローラー１５１は、搬送部１６の搬送ローラー１６２とともに搬送ベルト１６１を移動させる搬送ローラーとしての機能を有している。また、２つの固化ローラー１５１は、中心間距離が可変に構成されていてもよい。これにより、加圧力を調整することができる。この調整も、制御部１１によって制御される。 Also, the heating temperature by the upper solidifying roller 151 of the two solidifying rollers 151 and the heating temperature by the lower solidifying roller 151 may be the same or different. Further, the lower solidification roller 151 may be one in which the heater 152 is omitted. The lower solidification roller 151 has a function as a transport roller that moves the transport belt 161 together with the transport roller 162 of the transport unit 16. Further, the two solidifying rollers 151 may be configured so that the distance between the centers is variable. Thereby, a pressurizing force can be adjusted. This adjustment is also controlled by the control unit 11.
　また、前述したように、インク受容層９０２は、平坦化された状態となっている。これにより、インク受容層９０２が２つの固化ローラー１５１の間を通過する際、固化ローラー１５１からインク受容層９０２への熱伝導が良好となる。よって、インク受容層９０２は、その厚さ方向にわたって均一に加熱されることとなる。 Further, as described above, the ink receiving layer 902 is in a flattened state. Thereby, when the ink receiving layer 902 passes between the two solidifying rollers 151, the heat conduction from the solidifying roller 151 to the ink receiving layer 902 is improved. Therefore, the ink receiving layer 902 is uniformly heated over the thickness direction.
　例えば、インク受容層９０２を加圧する力を４００ｋｇ、インク受容層９０２を加熱する温度を１５０℃とした場合、得られるインク受容層９０２の厚さは、５０μｍとなる。そして、このインク受容層９０２にインクジェットプリンター（例えば、エプソン社製「PX-M5041F」）を用いてカラー印刷を施したところ、インク受容層９０２には、鮮明な画像が形成される。 For example, when the pressure for pressurizing the ink receiving layer 902 is 400 kg and the temperature for heating the ink receiving layer 902 is 150 ° C., the thickness of the obtained ink receiving layer 902 is 50 μm. When the ink receiving layer 902 is subjected to color printing using an ink jet printer (for example, “PX-M5041F” manufactured by Epson Corporation), a clear image is formed on the ink receiving layer 902.
　また、インク受容層固化を多段階で行なってもよい。この場合、２つの固化ローラー１５１を、ｘ軸方向に沿って複数組設置することができる。そして、各組での加熱温度をｘ軸方向正側に向かって下げてもよいし、上げてもよい。また、各組での加圧力を、ｘ軸方向正側に向かって下げてもよいし、上げてもよい。さらに、これらの条件を適宜組み合わせてもよい。 Further, the ink receiving layer may be solidified in multiple stages. In this case, a plurality of sets of two solidification rollers 151 can be installed along the x-axis direction. Then, the heating temperature in each group may be lowered or raised toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. Further, the applied pressure in each set may be lowered or raised toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. Furthermore, you may combine these conditions suitably.
　このようにインク受容層固化部１５を用いたステップＳ１０４（固化ステップ）は、インク受容層９０２（記録層）の固化を加熱および加圧により行なうステップとなっている。これにより、インク受容層９０２が基材９０１に固着した記録媒体９０が得られる。そして、この記録媒体９０は、インク受容層９０２に印刷が可能なものとなって記録媒体再生システム１００（記録媒体製造装置１Ｂ）から排出される。 In this way, step S104 (solidification step) using the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15 is a step in which the ink receiving layer 902 (recording layer) is solidified by heating and pressing. Thereby, the recording medium 90 in which the ink receiving layer 902 is fixed to the base material 901 is obtained. The recording medium 90 becomes printable on the ink receiving layer 902 and is discharged from the recording medium reproduction system 100 (recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B).
　また、前述したように、記録媒体９０は、マーキング部９０４が形成されている。マーキング部９０４は、インク受容層９０２（繊維含有層（記録層））に関する情報を含むシンボルである。そして、記録媒体再生システム１００では、マーキング部９０４（繊維含有層（記録層）に関する情報を含むシンボル）を形成するステップがあり（を有し）、そのステップをマーキング部形成部２０で実行することができる。マーキング部９０４が形成されることにより、前述したインク受容層９０２に関する情報を必要に応じて確認（取得）することができる。 As described above, the recording medium 90 has the marking portion 904 formed therein. The marking portion 904 is a symbol including information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 (fiber-containing layer (recording layer)). In the recording medium reproduction system 100, there is a step of forming a marking unit 904 (a symbol including information on the fiber-containing layer (recording layer)), and the step is executed by the marking unit forming unit 20. Can do. By forming the marking portion 904, the information regarding the ink receiving layer 902 described above can be confirmed (acquired) as necessary.
　本実施形態では、マーキング部９０４は、インク受容層９０２上に形成され、その形成をマーキング部形成部２０が担う。マーキング部形成部２０は、インク受容層固化部１５よりも下流側に配置されている。 In this embodiment, the marking part 904 is formed on the ink receiving layer 902, and the marking part forming part 20 takes charge of the formation. The marking part forming part 20 is arranged downstream of the ink receiving layer solidifying part 15.
　なお、マーキング部形成部２０は、例えば、インクジェットプリンターで構成されたものであってもよい。この場合、蛍光（不可視）インク（可視光照射時には、肉眼では見えないが、紫外線照射時には、肉眼で確認することができるインク）等のような特殊なインクを用いてマーキング部９０４を形成することができる。これにより、マーキング部９０４を通常は目立たないものとすることができ、記録媒体９０の使用上好ましい。また、マーキング部形成部２０は、インクジェットプリンターの他に、繊維含有材料でマーキング部９０４を静電塗布方式で形成するよう構成されたものであってもよい。 In addition, the marking part formation part 20 may be comprised with the inkjet printer, for example. In this case, the marking portion 904 is formed using a special ink such as fluorescent (invisible) ink (invisible to the naked eye when irradiated with visible light but visible to the naked eye when irradiated with ultraviolet light). Can do. Thereby, the marking part 904 can be made inconspicuous normally, which is preferable in use of the recording medium 90. Moreover, the marking part formation part 20 may be comprised so that the marking part 904 may be formed with an electrostatic application system with a fiber containing material other than an inkjet printer.
　また、マーキング部９０４がインク受容層９０２上に形成されていることにより、インク受容層９０２を除去することによって、そのインク受容層９０２ごとマーキング部９０４も除去することができる。これにより、マーキング部９０４の除去、再生も同時に可能となり、インク受容層９０２と、インク受容層９０２に関する情報を担持したマーキング部９０４との対応関係を適正化することができる。 Also, since the marking portion 904 is formed on the ink receiving layer 902, the marking portion 904 can be removed together with the ink receiving layer 902 by removing the ink receiving layer 902. Accordingly, the marking portion 904 can be removed and regenerated at the same time, and the correspondence between the ink receiving layer 902 and the marking portion 904 carrying information about the ink receiving layer 902 can be optimized.
　なお、マーキング部形成部２０は、本実施形態ではインク受容層固化部１５よりも下流側に配置されているが、これに限定されず、基材９０１の搬送途中であればその配置位置は問わない。例えば、マーキング部形成部２０がインク受容層形成部１３よりも上流側に配置されている場合、マーキング部９０４は、基材９０１の表裏のいずれに形成されてもよい。また、基材９０１とインク受容層９０２の間に配置されても良いし、或いはインク受容層９０２の内部に配置されていても良い。 In the present embodiment, the marking portion forming portion 20 is disposed on the downstream side of the ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15. However, the marking portion forming portion 20 is not limited to this. Absent. For example, when the marking part forming part 20 is disposed on the upstream side of the ink receiving layer forming part 13, the marking part 904 may be formed on either the front or back of the base material 901. Further, it may be disposed between the substrate 901 and the ink receiving layer 902 or may be disposed inside the ink receiving layer 902.
　以上のような構成の記録媒体再生システム１００により、記録媒体９０を製造することができる。この記録媒体９０は、例えばインクジェット方式で印刷が良好に行なわれる。また、記録媒体９０は、トナーを用いるレーザープリンターやコピー機でも印刷が良好に行なわれる。また、記録媒体９０は、手書きでも良好に用いられる。手書きの場合、例えば、油性インクや水性インクのペン、鉛筆等を用いることができる。 The recording medium 90 can be manufactured by the recording medium reproduction system 100 configured as described above. The recording medium 90 is favorably printed by, for example, an ink jet method. The recording medium 90 can be printed well even with a laser printer or a copier using toner. Further, the recording medium 90 can be used favorably even by handwriting. In the case of handwriting, for example, a pen or pencil of oil-based ink or water-based ink can be used.
　また、インク受容層９０２に印刷が施されて使用済みとなった記録媒体９０は、不要となる場合がある。この場合、使用済みの記録媒体９０は、記録媒体再生システム１００によってインク受容層９０２が除去され、その後新たなインク受容層９０２が形成される。このように、使用済みの記録媒体９０は、再度印刷が可能な記録媒体９０として再生される（製造される）。また、この再生は、記録媒体再生システム１００によって繰り返し行なうことができる。従って、記録媒体再生システム１００は、経済性に優れ、環境性にも優れたものとなっている。 Also, the recording medium 90 that has been used after printing on the ink receiving layer 902 may be unnecessary. In this case, the recording medium reproduction system 100 removes the ink receiving layer 902 from the used recording medium 90, and then a new ink receiving layer 902 is formed. In this manner, the used recording medium 90 is reproduced (manufactured) as a recording medium 90 that can be printed again. This reproduction can be repeatedly performed by the recording medium reproduction system 100. Therefore, the recording medium reproduction system 100 is excellent in economy and environmental.
　また、記録媒体再生システム１００は、例えば、オフィス、工場、家庭やスーパー、コンビニエンスストア等のような店舗、学校、病院、駅、公民館等のような公共機関等、いかなる場所にも設置することができる。 Further, the recording medium reproduction system 100 can be installed in any place such as offices, factories, stores such as homes, supermarkets, convenience stores, etc., public institutions such as schools, hospitals, stations, public halls, etc. it can.
　＜第２実施形態＞
　図１０は、第２実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す垂直断面図である。 Second Embodiment
FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the second embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第２実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　前記第１実施形態でも述べたように、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つで行なうのが好ましい。また、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去に、除去部材として、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを用いることができる。そして、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去を研磨で行ない、その研磨にフラップブラシ１２５を用いる。これにより、研磨に適した工具を用いることができ、よって、その研磨を容易かつ迅速に行なうことができる。 As described in the first embodiment, in step S101 (first step), the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing. In step S101 (first step), at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material). In this embodiment, the fiber-containing material is removed by polishing, and the flap brush 125 is used for the polishing. Thereby, a tool suitable for polishing can be used, and therefore the polishing can be performed easily and quickly.
　図１０に示すように、材料除去部１２は、回転ドラム１２１と、ポンプ１２３と、フラップブラシ１２５とを有している。 As shown in FIG. 10, the material removing unit 12 has a rotating drum 121, a pump 123, and a flap brush 125.
　フラップブラシ１２５は、回転ドラム１２１に対してｘ軸方向正側に配置され、回転ドラム１２１の外周側から接近可能に支持されている。このフラップブラシ１２５は、円筒体の外周部に不織布１２５ａが巻回、固定されたものである。また、フラップブラシ１２５は、その駆動源であるモーター（図示せず）によって、回転ドラム１２１の回転方向と同様に、ｙ軸回りに矢印α１２５方向（時計回り）に回転することができる。 The flap brush 125 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotating drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 121. The flap brush 125 is obtained by winding and fixing a nonwoven fabric 125a around the outer periphery of a cylindrical body. Further, the flap brush 125 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow α125 (clockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a driving source thereof, similarly to the rotation direction of the rotary drum 121.
　図１０に示すように、材料除去部１２では、記録媒体９０’を固定した回転ドラム１２１が矢印α１２１方向に回転した状態で、フラップブラシ１２５を矢印α１２５方向に回転させつつ回転ドラム１２１に接近させることができる。これにより、フラップブラシ１２５でインク受容層９０２を研磨することができ、よって、インク受容層９０２を基材９０１から過不足なく除去することができる。また、研磨時に基材９０１にカッターマークが形成されるのを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 10, in the material removing unit 12, the flap brush 125 is moved in the direction of the arrow α <b> 125 while the rotary drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated in the direction of the arrow α <b> 121. be able to. Accordingly, the ink receiving layer 902 can be polished with the flap brush 125, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed from the substrate 901 without excess or deficiency. Further, it is possible to prevent a cutter mark from being formed on the base material 901 during polishing.
　なお、フラップブラシ１２５は、本実施形態ではインク受容層９０２を研磨するときには時計回りに回転しているが、これに限定されず、反時計回りに回転してもよい。フラップブラシ１２５が反時計回りに回転する場合、フラップブラシ１２５と回転ドラム１２１との間に周速差を設けることとなる。 In this embodiment, the flap brush 125 rotates clockwise when the ink receiving layer 902 is polished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flap brush 125 may rotate counterclockwise. When the flap brush 125 rotates counterclockwise, a peripheral speed difference is provided between the flap brush 125 and the rotary drum 121.
　＜第３実施形態＞
　図１１は、第３実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部を示す平面図である。 <Third Embodiment>
FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a material removing unit of a recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the third embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第３実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproduction method, and a recording medium reproduction apparatus according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　前記第１実施形態でも述べたように、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つで行なうのが好ましい。また、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去に、除去部材として、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを用いることができる。そして、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去をスクレイプで行ない、スクレイパー１２６を用いる。 As described in the first embodiment, in step S101 (first step), the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing. In step S101 (first step), at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material). In this embodiment, the fiber-containing material is removed by scraping, and the scraper 126 is used.
　図１１に示すように、材料除去部１２は、回転ドラム１２１と、スクレイパー１２６とを有している。 As shown in FIG. 11, the material removing unit 12 includes a rotating drum 121 and a scraper 126.
　スクレイパー１２６は、ステンレス鋼等のような金属材料で構成された板部材であり、その長手方向がｙ軸方向と平行に配置されている。なお、スクレイパー１２６の全長は、基材９０１のｙ軸方向の長さよりも長いのが好ましい。また、スクレイパー１２６は、回転ドラム１２１に対してｘ軸方向正側に配置され、回転ドラム１２１の外周側から接近可能に支持されている。そして、記録媒体９０’を固定した回転ドラム１２１が回転した状態でスクレイパー１２６を回転ドラム１２１に接近させることにより、スクレイパー１２６でインク受容層９０２をスクレイプすることができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２を基材９０１から除去することができる。 The scraper 126 is a plate member made of a metal material such as stainless steel, and its longitudinal direction is arranged in parallel to the y-axis direction. The overall length of the scraper 126 is preferably longer than the length of the base material 901 in the y-axis direction. The scraper 126 is disposed on the positive side in the x-axis direction with respect to the rotary drum 121 and is supported so as to be accessible from the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 121. The scraper 126 can be scraped by the scraper 126 by bringing the scraper 126 closer to the rotating drum 121 while the rotating drum 121 to which the recording medium 90 ′ is fixed is rotated. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be removed from the base material 901.
　また、前記第１実施形態でも述べたように、インク受容層９０２を構成する繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）は、セルロース繊維と、セルロース繊維の少なくとも一部を被覆する疎水性材料とを含む複合体であり、疎水性材料は熱可塑樹脂を含む。このため、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）を加熱しつつ、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去を行なうのが好ましい。これにより、インク受容層９０２が軟化し、よって、インク受容層９０２の除去を容易に行なうことができる。 As described in the first embodiment, the fiber-containing material (information recording material) constituting the ink receiving layer 902 is a composite containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material that covers at least a part of the cellulose fibers. And the hydrophobic material includes a thermoplastic resin. For this reason, in step S101 (first step), it is preferable to remove the fiber-containing material (information recording material) while heating the fiber-containing material (information recording material). As a result, the ink receiving layer 902 is softened, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be easily removed.
　なお、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去に際し、繊維含有材料を加熱する構成として、スクレイパー１２６がヒーター１２６ａを内蔵したものとなっている。ヒーター１２６ａは、通電により発熱する発熱体で構成されているのが好ましい。この発熱体としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ニクロム線のような電熱線等を用いることができる。これにより、スクレイパー１２６が加熱されて熱を帯び、その熱でインク受容層９０２を軟化させることができる。また、スクレイパーでなくドラム側に発熱体を配置し、加熱しながらインク受容層を軟化させ、除去しても良い。 In this embodiment, the scraper 126 includes a heater 126a as a configuration for heating the fiber-containing material when the fiber-containing material is removed. The heater 126a is preferably composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized. The heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used. Thereby, the scraper 126 is heated and heated, and the ink receiving layer 902 can be softened by the heat. Further, a heating element may be disposed on the drum side instead of the scraper, and the ink receiving layer may be softened and removed while heating.
　また、スクレイパー１２６には、インク受容層９０２のスクレイプによって除去されたもの（以下これを「付着物」と言う）が付着することがある。そこで、材料除去部１２は、スクレイパー１２６から付着物を除去するクリーニング部を有するのが好ましい。これにより、繊維含有材料の除去を開始するたびに、付着物が除去されたスクレイパー１２６を用いることができる。 In addition, the scraper 126 may adhere to what is removed by scraping the ink receiving layer 902 (hereinafter referred to as “adhesive”). Therefore, it is preferable that the material removing unit 12 has a cleaning unit that removes deposits from the scraper 126. Thereby, whenever it starts removal of a fiber containing material, the scraper 126 from which the deposit | attachment was removed can be used.
　＜第４実施形態＞
　図１２および図１３は、それぞれ、第４実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体再生装置の材料除去部の作動状態を順に示す垂直断面図である。 <Fourth embodiment>
12 and 13 are vertical cross-sectional views sequentially showing the operating state of the material removing unit of the recording medium reproducing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fourth embodiment.
　以下、これらの図を参照して本発明の第４実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to these drawings. The difference will be mainly described, and the description of the same matters will be omitted.
　前記第１実施形態でも述べたように、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、記録媒体９０’からインク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去を切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの少なくとも１つで行なうのが好ましい。また、ステップＳ１０１（第１ステップ）では、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）の除去に、除去部材として、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを用いることができる。そして、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去を研削で行ない、その研削に弾性グラインダー６を用いる。これにより、研削に適した工具を用いることができ、よって、その研削を容易かつ迅速に行なうことができる。 As described in the first embodiment, in step S101 (first step), the removal of the fiber-containing material (information recording material) that is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902 from the recording medium 90 ′ is cut, scraped, and ground. And at least one of polishing. In step S101 (first step), at least one of a cutting tool, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder can be used as a removing member for removing the fiber-containing material (information recording material). In this embodiment, the fiber-containing material is removed by grinding, and the elastic grinder 6 is used for the grinding. Thereby, a tool suitable for grinding can be used, and therefore grinding can be performed easily and quickly.
　図１２、図１３に示すように、本実施形態では、材料除去部１２は、搬送部７と、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）と、支持ローラー（プラテンローラー）８と、を有する。これにより、基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）にｘ軸方向正側に向かって引張り力を付与しながら、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）でインク受容層９０２（情報記録材料）を除去することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in this embodiment, the material removing unit 12 includes a transport unit 7, an elastic grinder 6 (removing member), and a support roller (platen roller) 8. Thus, the ink receiving layer 902 (information recording material) can be removed by the elastic grinder 6 (removal member) while applying a tensile force to the base 901 (recording medium 90 ′) toward the positive side in the x-axis direction. it can.
　弾性グラインダー６は、円筒体の外周部に弾性膜６１が巻回、固定されたものである。弾性膜６１には、研削用の砥粒が均一に混入されている。この弾性グラインダー６は、その駆動源であるモーター（図示せず）によって、ｙ軸回りに矢印α６方向（反時計回り）に回転することができる。これにより、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）は、矢印α６方向に回転することにより、基材９０１上の印刷済みのインク受容層９０２、すなわち、繊維含有材料（情報記録材料）を除去することができる。 The elastic grinder 6 is obtained by winding and fixing an elastic film 61 around the outer periphery of a cylindrical body. Abrasive grains for grinding are uniformly mixed in the elastic film 61. The elastic grinder 6 can be rotated around the y axis in the direction of arrow α6 (counterclockwise) by a motor (not shown) as a drive source. Thereby, the elastic grinder 6 (removal member) can remove the printed ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901, that is, the fiber-containing material (information recording material), by rotating in the direction of the arrow α6. .
　搬送部７は、印刷済みのインク受容層９０２が形成された第１面９０５（記録面）を有する基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）を搬送するものである。この搬送部７は、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）と、２つの第２搬送ローラー７３（一対の第２ローラー）と、を有する。 The transport unit 7 transports a base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') having a first surface 905 (recording surface) on which a printed ink receiving layer 902 is formed. The transport unit 7 includes two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) and two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers).
　２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）は、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）に対して基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）の搬送方向上流側に配置されている。これら２つの第１搬送ローラー７２は、上下に配置されており、それぞれ矢印α７２方向に回転することができる。これにより、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）は、基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）を挟持しつつ回転して、基材９０１を搬送することができる。 The two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) are disposed on the upstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') with respect to the elastic grinder 6 (removal member). These two first transport rollers 72 are arranged one above the other and can rotate in the direction of arrow α72. Accordingly, the two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) can rotate while sandwiching the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ′) to transport the base material 901.
　２つの第２搬送ローラー７３（一対の第２ローラー）は、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）に対して基材９０１の搬送方向下流側に配置されている。これら２つの第２搬送ローラー７３は、第１搬送ローラー７２と同様に上下に配置されており、それぞれ矢印α７３方向に回転することができる。これにより、２つの第２搬送ローラー７３（一対の第２ローラー）は、基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）を挟持しつつ回転して、基材９０１を搬送することができる。 The two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers) are disposed on the downstream side in the transport direction of the base material 901 with respect to the elastic grinder 6 (removal member). These two second transport rollers 73 are arranged up and down similarly to the first transport roller 72, and can rotate in the direction of the arrow α73, respectively. As a result, the two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers) can rotate while sandwiching the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ') to transport the base material 901.
　なお、第１搬送ローラー７２や第２搬送ローラー７３では、基材９０１を搬送する搬送速度を変更可能に構成されている。この変更方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２のうち、主動ローラーとなっている第１搬送ローラー７２と、この第１搬送ローラー７２に接続されるモーターとの間に減速機を設ける方法等が挙げられる（第２搬送ローラー７３についても同様）。 In addition, in the 1st conveyance roller 72 and the 2nd conveyance roller 73, it is comprised so that the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is changeable. This changing method is not particularly limited, and for example, between the first transport roller 72 that is the main driving roller of the two first transport rollers 72 and the motor connected to the first transport roller 72. A method of providing a speed reducer is also included (the same applies to the second transport roller 73).
　また、第１搬送ローラー７２や第２搬送ローラー７３では、基材９０１を挟持する挟持力（グリップ力）も変更可能に構成されている。ここで、「挟持力」とは、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２で基材９０１を挟持した状態とし、この挟持状態から基材９０１を引き抜くのに要する力のことを言う（第２搬送ローラー７３についても同様）。挟持力の変更方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、前記減速機にカム機構を設けて、カムの切り換えによって変更する方法等が挙げられる。 Also, the first conveying roller 72 and the second conveying roller 73 are configured so that the clamping force (grip force) for clamping the substrate 901 can also be changed. Here, the “clamping force” refers to a force required to pull out the base material 901 from the sandwiched state when the base material 901 is held between the two first transport rollers 72 (second transport roller 73). The same applies to). The method for changing the clamping force is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which a cam mechanism is provided in the speed reducer and changed by switching the cam.
　支持ローラー８は、弾性グラインダー６の下側に配置されている。この支持ローラー８は、弾性グラインダー６を下方から支持するものである。また、支持ローラー８は、基材９０１の搬送に伴って、ｙ軸回りに矢印α８方向（時計回り）に回転することができる。 The support roller 8 is disposed below the elastic grinder 6. The support roller 8 supports the elastic grinder 6 from below. Further, the support roller 8 can rotate in the direction of the arrow α8 (clockwise) around the y axis as the substrate 901 is conveyed.
　以上のような構成の材料除去部１２では、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）の速度を第１速度Ｖ７２（Ｖａ）、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）の挟持力を第１挟持力Ｆ７２（Ｆａ）、２つの第２搬送ローラー７３（一対の第２ローラー）の速度を第２速度Ｖ７３（Ｖｂ）、２つの第２搬送ローラー７３（一対の第２ローラー）の挟持力を第２挟持力Ｆ７３（Ｆｂ）、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）の速度を第３速度Ｖ６（Ｖｃ）、弾性グラインダー６（除去部材）の研削力を研削力Ｆ６（Ｆｃ）としたとき、基材９０１の位置に応じて下記式を満足するのが好ましい。 In the material removing unit 12 configured as described above, the speed of the two first transport rollers 72 (the pair of first rollers) is set to the first speed V72 (Va), and the two first transport rollers 72 (the pair of first rollers). ) Is the first clamping force F72 (Fa), the speed of the two second transport rollers 73 (a pair of second rollers) is the second speed V73 (Vb), and the two second transport rollers 73 (the pair of second transport rollers 73) 2 rollers) is the second clamping force F73 (Fb), the elastic grinder 6 (removing member) is the third speed V6 (Vc), and the elastic grinder 6 (removing member) is the grinding force F6 (Fc). ), It is preferable that the following formula is satisfied according to the position of the substrate 901.
　図１２に示すように、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）が基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）を挟持している場合には、Ｖ７２（Ｖａ）＜Ｖ６（Ｖｃ）、かつ、Ｆ７２（Ｆａ）＞Ｆ６（Ｆｃ）を満足する。 As shown in FIG. 12, when two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) sandwich a substrate 901 (recording medium 90 ′), V72 (Va) <V6 (Vc), And F72 (Fa)> F6 (Fc) is satisfied.
　また、図１３に示すように、２つの第１搬送ローラー７２（一対の第１ローラー）による基材９０１（記録媒体９０’）の挟持が解除された場合には、Ｖ６（Ｖｃ）＜Ｖ７３（Ｖｂ）、かつ、Ｆ６（Ｆｃ）＜Ｆ７３（Ｆｂ）を満足する。 As shown in FIG. 13, when the holding of the base material 901 (recording medium 90 ′) by the two first transport rollers 72 (a pair of first rollers) is released, V6 (Vc) <V73 ( Vb) and F6 (Fc) <F73 (Fb) is satisfied.
　以上のような式を満足することにより、インク受容層９０２を除去する際、基材９０１を搬送方向下流側、すなわち、Ｘ軸方向正側に向かって引っ張った状態とすることができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２の除去を１回の搬送（ワンパス）で安定して行なうことができる。 By satisfying the above formula, when the ink receiving layer 902 is removed, the substrate 901 can be pulled toward the downstream side in the transport direction, that is, the positive side in the X-axis direction. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 can be stably removed by one transport (one pass).
　また、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料の除去を多段階の研削で行なってもよい。この場合、弾性グラインダー６と支持ローラー８との組をｘ軸方向に沿って複数配置することができる。そして、この場合、各弾性グラインダー６の弾性膜６１内の砥粒を段階的に細かくするのが好ましい。これにより、繊維含有材料が除去された第１面９０５をより平滑に良好にすることができる。 In this embodiment, the fiber-containing material may be removed by multi-stage grinding. In this case, a plurality of sets of the elastic grinder 6 and the support roller 8 can be arranged along the x-axis direction. In this case, it is preferable to make the abrasive grains in the elastic film 61 of each elastic grinder 6 finer in stages. Thereby, the 1st surface 905 from which the fiber containing material was removed can be made smoother and better.
　＜第５実施形態＞
　図１４は、第５実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す平面図である。図１５は、図１４中のＤ－Ｄ断面図である。 <Fifth Embodiment>
FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 15 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG.
　以下、これらの図を参照して本発明の第５実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproduction method, and a recording medium reproduction apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to these drawings. The difference will be mainly described, and the description of the same matters will be omitted.
　図１４に示すように、本実施形態では、表面性状処理部１４の均し処理部３は、スクレイパー（スキージー）３４を有している。スクレイパー３４は、長尺状をなす板部材で構成されている。このスクレイパー３４は、搬送ベルト１６１の上側で、ｘ軸方向、すなわち、記録媒体９０の搬送方向ＣＤ１６に対して傾斜して配置されている。また、スクレイパー３４の両端部は、それぞれ、台座３５に支持されている。これにより、スクレイパー３４は、両持ち支持された状態となり、安定して搬送ベルト１６１上で載置される。このように配置されたスクレイパー３４は、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａがｘ軸方向正側に移動するのに従って、表面９０２ａの筋ムラを形成する微小な凹凸等が搬送方向ＣＤ１６の上流側に押し戻される。また、押し戻された余分な部分は、スクレイパー３４の傾斜方向に沿って矢印α３４方向に移動して行き、その移動先で回収される。 As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, the leveling processing unit 3 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a scraper (squeegee) 34. The scraper 34 is formed of a long plate member. The scraper 34 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyance belt 161 and is inclined with respect to the x-axis direction, that is, the conveyance direction CD16 of the recording medium 90. Further, both end portions of the scraper 34 are supported by the pedestal 35, respectively. As a result, the scraper 34 is supported on both ends and is stably placed on the conveyor belt 161. In the scraper 34 arranged in this way, as the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 moves to the positive side in the x-axis direction, minute irregularities and the like that form streaks on the surface 902a are pushed back to the upstream side in the transport direction CD16. It is. Further, the excess portion pushed back moves in the direction of the arrow α34 along the inclination direction of the scraper 34 and is collected at the moving destination.
　なお、スクレイパー３４は、搬送方向ＣＤ１６に対する傾斜角度を変更可能に構成されていてもよい。 Note that the scraper 34 may be configured to be able to change the inclination angle with respect to the transport direction CD16.
　また、図１５に示すように、均し処理部３は、３つの支持ローラー３２も有している。これら３つの支持ローラー３２は、ｘ軸方向に沿って間隔を置いて配置されている。また、図１４に示すように、３つの支持ローラー３２は、いずれも、平面視でスクレイパー３４と交差している、すなわち、一部が重なって配置されているのが好ましい。これにより、前記微小な凹凸の解消を過不足なく安定して行なうことができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the leveling processing unit 3 also has three support rollers 32. These three support rollers 32 are arranged at intervals along the x-axis direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, it is preferable that all of the three support rollers 32 intersect with the scraper 34 in a plan view, that is, are partially overlapped. Thereby, the minute unevenness can be stably eliminated without being excessive or insufficient.
　なお、スクレイパー３４と各支持ローラー３２とのｚ軸方向の距離を変更可能になっていてもよい。 Note that the distance in the z-axis direction between the scraper 34 and each support roller 32 may be changeable.
　＜第６実施形態＞
　図１６は、第６実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す平面図である。 <Sixth Embodiment>
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the sixth embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第６実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　図１６に示すように、本実施形態では、表面性状処理部１４の均し処理部３は、均しローラー３６と、支持ローラー３２とを有している。 As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, the leveling processing unit 3 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a leveling roller 36 and a support roller 32.
　均しローラー３６は、搬送ベルト１６１の上側に配置され、回転支持部３７に回転可能に支持されている。この均しローラー３６は、その駆動源であるモーター（図示せず）によって、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａに接しつつ回転することができる。また、均しローラー３６の外周部には、螺旋状の溝３６１が形成されている。この溝３６１により、インク受容層９０２の表面９０２ａは、ｘ軸方向正側に移動するのに従って、筋ムラを形成する微小な凹凸等が削ぎ取られて解消される。また、削ぎ取られた余分な材料は、溝３６１に沿って回転支持部３７側に向かって移動して行き、その移動先で回収される。 The leveling roller 36 is disposed on the upper side of the conveyor belt 161 and is rotatably supported by the rotation support portion 37. The leveling roller 36 can be rotated by being in contact with the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 by a motor (not shown) as a driving source. A spiral groove 361 is formed on the outer periphery of the leveling roller 36. Due to the groove 361, the surface 902a of the ink receiving layer 902 is eliminated by removing minute irregularities and the like that form streaks as the surface 902a moves to the positive side in the x-axis direction. Further, the excess material scraped off moves toward the rotation support portion 37 along the groove 361 and is collected at the destination.
　＜第７実施形態＞
　図１７は、第７実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の表面性状処理部を示す垂直断面図である。 <Seventh embodiment>
FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the surface texture processing unit of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the seventh embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第７実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　図１７に示すように、本実施形態では、表面性状処理部１４の半固化処理部５は、チャンバー５１と、ヒーター５３とを有している。 As shown in FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, the semi-solidification processing unit 5 of the surface texture processing unit 14 includes a chamber 51 and a heater 53.
　ヒーター５３は、チャンバー５１内で搬送ベルト１６１の下側に配置されている。ヒーター５３は、通電により発熱する発熱体で構成されている。この発熱体としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ニクロム線のような電熱線等を用いることができる。これにより、インク受容層９０２は、チャンバー５１内を通過する間にヒーター５３からの熱が搬送ベルト１６１を介して伝わって、表面９０２ａに薄膜が形成される。この薄膜化により、インク受容層９０２の構成材料である繊維含有材料の飛散防止やインク受容層９０２の形状維持等を図ることができる。 The heater 53 is disposed below the conveyor belt 161 in the chamber 51. The heater 53 is composed of a heating element that generates heat when energized. The heating element is not particularly limited, and for example, a heating wire such as a nichrome wire can be used. As a result, while the ink receiving layer 902 passes through the chamber 51, heat from the heater 53 is transmitted through the transport belt 161, and a thin film is formed on the surface 902a. This thinning can prevent scattering of the fiber-containing material, which is a constituent material of the ink receiving layer 902, maintain the shape of the ink receiving layer 902, and the like.
　また、本実施形態では、前記第１実施形態と同様に、チャンバー５１内で搬送ベルト１６１の下側にヒーター５２が配置されていてもよい。この場合、ヒーター５２とヒーター５３との加熱条件（加熱時間等）を異ならせてもよい。 Further, in the present embodiment, the heater 52 may be disposed below the conveyor belt 161 in the chamber 51 as in the first embodiment. In this case, the heating conditions (heating time etc.) of the heater 52 and the heater 53 may be different.
　＜第８実施形態＞
　図１８は、第８実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置のインク受容層形成部を示す垂直断面図である。 <Eighth Embodiment>
FIG. 18 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eighth embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第８実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　図１８に示すように、本実施形態では、転写部１３６は、コロトロンまたはスコロトロンで構成されている。この転写部１３６は、搬送ベルト１６１に対して感光体１３１と反対側に配置されている。また、転写部１３６は、基材９０１上で感光体１３１（担持体）を、基材９０１に転写される繊維含有材料のインク受容層９０２（層）の厚さよりも大きく離間させて、繊維含有材料の転写を行なう。このような転写部１３６により、転写を非接触で行なうことができ、よって、例えば転写時の振動や騒音を抑制することができる。また、非接触での転写により、転写時の目詰まりを防止することができ、よって、インク受容層９０２での筋ムラ等の発生を防止すことができる。また、振動が抑制されているため、繊維含有材料が乱れて転写されるのを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 18, in the present embodiment, the transfer unit 136 is composed of a corotron or a scorotron. The transfer unit 136 is disposed on the opposite side of the photoreceptor 131 with respect to the conveyor belt 161. In addition, the transfer unit 136 separates the photosensitive member 131 (carrying member) on the base material 901 more greatly than the thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 (layer) of the fiber-containing material transferred to the base material 901, thereby containing the fiber. Transfer material. By such a transfer unit 136, transfer can be performed in a non-contact manner, and thus vibration and noise during transfer can be suppressed, for example. Further, non-contact transfer can prevent clogging at the time of transfer, and therefore, occurrence of streaks in the ink receiving layer 902 can be prevented. Moreover, since vibration is suppressed, the fiber-containing material can be prevented from being disturbed and transferred.
　＜第９実施形態＞
　図１９は、第９実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置のインク受容層形成部を示す垂直断面図である。 <Ninth Embodiment>
FIG. 19 is a vertical sectional view showing an ink receiving layer forming part of a recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the ninth embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第９実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　図１９に示すように、本実施形態では、繊維含有材料を担持する担持体１８は、ｙ軸回りに矢印α１８（反時計回り）に回転する回転体である。この担持体１８（回転体）は、アルミニウム等のような導電性材料で構成されたコア１８１と、コア１８１の外周部に形成され、樹脂材料等のような誘電体（絶縁性材料）で構成された誘電体層１８２と、を有する。なお、誘電体としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等のようなポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、四フッ化エチレン樹脂等の各種樹脂材料を用いることができる。 As shown in FIG. 19, in this embodiment, the carrier 18 that carries the fiber-containing material is a rotating body that rotates in the direction of an arrow α18 (counterclockwise) about the y axis. The carrier 18 (rotating body) is formed of a core 181 made of a conductive material such as aluminum, and a dielectric (insulating material) such as a resin material formed on the outer periphery of the core 181. A dielectric layer 182. As the dielectric, for example, various resin materials such as polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, and tetrafluoroethylene resin can be used.
　また、担持体１８には、層形成ローラー１９が接触している。層形成ローラー１９は、ｙ軸回りに矢印α１９（時計回り）に回転することができる。これにより、層形成ローラー１９は、誘電体層１８２に接触して、誘電体層１８２から基材９０１上に静電気力で繊維含有材料を移動させることができる。 The layer forming roller 19 is in contact with the carrier 18. The layer forming roller 19 can rotate in the direction of the arrow α19 (clockwise) around the y axis. As a result, the layer forming roller 19 can contact the dielectric layer 182 and move the fiber-containing material from the dielectric layer 182 onto the substrate 901 with electrostatic force.
　このような担持体１８を用いることにより、インク受容層形成部１３の構成を、例えば前記第１実施形態中のインク受容層形成部１３に比べて、簡単なものとすることができる。 By using such a carrier 18, the configuration of the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 can be simplified as compared with, for example, the ink receiving layer forming unit 13 in the first embodiment.
　＜第１０実施形態＞
　図２０は、第１０実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。図２１は、第１０実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。 <Tenth Embodiment>
FIG. 20 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the tenth embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第１０実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。また、本実施形態では、前記第１実施形態から前記第９実施形態までの構成を適用することができる。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted. Moreover, in this embodiment, the structure from the said 1st Embodiment to the said 9th Embodiment is applicable.
　記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ、第１速度Ｖ１で搬送する担持体である感光体１３１と、基材９０１を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送する搬送部１６と、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１（担持体）から基材９０１に転写する転写部１３４と、を備え、転写部１３４では、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは、平行（同じ）であり、Ｖ１＞Ｖ２なる関係を満足する。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B conveys the photosensitive member 131, which is a carrier that carries a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, and carries the substrate 901 at a second speed V2. And a transfer unit 134 that transfers the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) to the base material 901. In the transfer unit 134, the fiber-containing material is transferred by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member). The direction CD131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are parallel (same) and satisfy the relationship V1> V2.
　また、記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を第１速度Ｖ１で搬送するとともに、基材９０１を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送して、繊維含有材料を基材９０１に転写するステップを有し、このステップでは、｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足する。 In addition, the method for manufacturing a recording medium includes conveying a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material at a first speed V1, and conveying a base material 901 at a second speed V2, thereby making the fiber-containing material a base material. 901 has a transfer step 901, and in this step, the relationship | V1 |> | V2 | is satisfied.
　このような発明によれば、第１速度Ｖ１と第２速度Ｖ２の間に大小をつけるという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を基材９０１に比較的多く留まらせることができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層９０２をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 According to such an invention, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be retained on the base material 901 with a simple configuration in which the magnitude is set between the first speed V1 and the second speed V2. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　図２０、図２１に示すように、本実施形態では、搬送部１６は、搬送ローラー１６３を有している。この搬送ローラー１６３は、２つの搬送ローラー１６３が上下で１組となって、これらの間で基材９０１を挟持しつつ搬送するよう構成されている。また、各組の搬送ローラー１６３は、ｘ軸方向に沿って間隔を置いて配置されている。なお、ｘ軸方向に隣り合う各組の搬送ローラー１６３同士の間隔は、前記第１実施形態でｘ軸方向に隣り合う各組の搬送ローラー１６２同士の間隔よりも小さいのが好ましい。例えば、ｘ軸方向に隣り合う各組の搬送ローラー１６３同士の間隔としては、基材９０１のｘ方向の長さよりも小さいのが好ましい。 As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the present embodiment, the transport unit 16 includes a transport roller 163. The transport roller 163 is configured such that two transport rollers 163 form a pair at the top and bottom and transport the substrate 901 between them. In addition, each pair of transport rollers 163 is arranged at intervals along the x-axis direction. In addition, it is preferable that the space | interval of each pair of conveyance rollers 163 adjacent to x-axis direction is smaller than the space | interval of each group of conveyance rollers 162 adjacent to x-axis direction in the said 1st Embodiment. For example, the distance between each pair of transport rollers 163 adjacent in the x-axis direction is preferably smaller than the length of the base material 901 in the x direction.
　そして、各搬送ローラー１６３がそれぞれ矢印α１６３方向に回転することによって基材９０１を搬送することができる。なお、本実施形態では、搬送部１６は、全ての搬送ローラー１６３がモーターに接続された駆動ローラーである必要はなく、基材９０１の搬送が可能であれば、どの搬送ローラー１６３が駆動ローラーであるかについては任意である。また、搬送部１６は、基材９０１を搬送する搬送速度を変更可能に構成されている。この変更方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、搬送ローラー１６３に接続されるモーターに対して印加する電圧を調整する方法等が挙げられる。 And the base material 901 can be conveyed by each conveyance roller 163 rotating to the arrow (alpha) 163 direction, respectively. In the present embodiment, the transport unit 16 does not need to be a drive roller in which all the transport rollers 163 are connected to a motor, and any transport roller 163 can be a drive roller as long as the substrate 901 can be transported. It is optional. Moreover, the conveyance part 16 is comprised so that change of the conveyance speed which conveys the base material 901 is possible. The changing method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method of adjusting a voltage applied to a motor connected to the transport roller 163.
　また、図２０に示すように、転写ニップ１３５（転写部１３４上）では、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは同じとなっている。そして、転写ニップ１３５での、感光体１３１が繊維含有材料を担持しつつ、搬送する速度をＶ１３１（第１速度Ｖ１）、搬送部１６が基材９０１を搬送する速度をＶ１６（第２速度Ｖ２）としたとき、Ｖ１３１＞Ｖ１６（すなわち第１速度Ｖ１＞第２速度Ｖ２）なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。このような大小関係により、繊維含有材料は、感光体１３１から基材９０１に転写される際、転写ニップ１３５で一旦（一時的に）ｘ軸方向負側に向かって寄せて集められて溜まることとなる。そして、転写ニップ１３５での繊維含有材料の溜まりが限界に達すると、この繊維含有材料は、基材９０１とともに搬送されて、層状となる。このような現象は、速度Ｖ１３１と速度Ｖ１６との間に大小をつけるという簡単な構成で発現可能であり、当該現象により、インク受容層９０２をできる限り厚く形成することができる。なお、この現象によって形成されるインク受容層９０２の厚さとしては、例えば、１０μｍ以上が可能であり、好ましくは１０μｍ以上１００μｍ以下が可能である。また、速度Ｖ１３１と速度Ｖ１６との大小関係を満足させるのは、前述したように、感光体１３１の回転速度や搬送部１６の搬送速度を調整することにより可能である。また、各速度調整は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the transfer nip 135 (on the transfer unit 134), the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are: It is the same. At the transfer nip 135, the speed at which the photoconductor 131 carries the fiber-containing material while being conveyed is V131 (first speed V1), and the speed at which the conveyance unit 16 conveys the substrate 901 is V16 (second speed V2). ), It is preferable to satisfy the relationship V131> V16 (that is, the first speed V1> the second speed V2). Due to such a magnitude relationship, when the fiber-containing material is transferred from the photosensitive member 131 to the base material 901, the fiber-containing material is once collected (temporarily) gathered and collected toward the negative side in the x-axis direction at the transfer nip 135. It becomes. When the accumulation of the fiber-containing material at the transfer nip 135 reaches the limit, the fiber-containing material is transported together with the base material 901 to be layered. Such a phenomenon can be expressed with a simple configuration in which the magnitude is set between the speed V131 and the speed V16, and the ink receiving layer 902 can be formed as thick as possible due to the phenomenon. The thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 formed by this phenomenon can be, for example, 10 μm or more, and preferably 10 μm or more and 100 μm or less. Further, it is possible to satisfy the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 by adjusting the rotational speed of the photosensitive member 131 and the transport speed of the transport unit 16 as described above. Each speed adjustment is controlled by the control unit 11.
　また、速度Ｖ１３１と速度Ｖ１６との大小関係は、次の２つの条件（２式）のうちの少なくとも一方を満足するのが好ましい。 Moreover, it is preferable that the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 satisfies at least one of the following two conditions (formula 2).
　１つ目の条件は、｜Ｖ１３１｜／｜Ｖ１６｜＞１．２（すなわち、｜第１速度Ｖ１｜／｜第２速度Ｖ２｜＞１．２）なる関係を満足することである。
　２つ目の条件は、｜Ｖ１３１｜／｜Ｖ１６｜＜１５（すなわち｜第１速度Ｖ１｜／｜第２速度Ｖ２｜＜１５）なる関係を満足することである。 The first condition is to satisfy the relationship | V131 | / | V16 |> 1.2 (that is, | first speed V1 | / | second speed V2 |> 1.2).
The second condition is to satisfy the relationship of | V131 | / | V16 | <15 (that is, | first speed V1 | / | second speed V2 | <15).
　このような条件を満足することにより、できる限り厚いインク受容層９０２の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 By satisfying such conditions, the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
　＜第１１実施形態＞
　図２２は、第１１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。図２３は、第１１実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の下流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。 <Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 22 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium playback system of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a vertical sectional side view showing the downstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the eleventh embodiment.
　以下、これらの図を参照して本発明の第１１実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to these drawings. The difference will be mainly described, and the description of the same matters will be omitted.
　本実施形態では、記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体である感光体１３１と、基材９０１を搬送する搬送部１６と、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１（担持体）から基材９０１に転写する転写部１３４と、を備え、転写部１３４では、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは反対方向である。
　このような発明によれば、感光体１３１による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とを反対方向とするという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を基材９０１に比較的多く留まらせることができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層９０２をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 In the present embodiment, the recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B includes a photoreceptor 131 that is a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit 16 that conveys a base material 901, and the like. A transfer unit 134 that transfers the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) to the substrate 901. In the transfer unit 134, the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) and the transporting unit 16 is the direction opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901.
According to such an invention, the fiber-containing material is a base material with a simple configuration in which the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photoreceptor 131 and the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16 are opposite directions. 901 can remain relatively large. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　図２２に示すように、本実施形態では、基材９０１は、ｘ軸方向正側から供給され、搬送部１６によってｘ方向負側に向かって搬送される。そして、その搬送途中で、インク受容層形成部１３によって基材９０１にインク受容層９０２が形成される。また、インク受容層９０２の形成後、図２３に示すように、基材９０１上のインク受容層９０２は、表面性状処理部１４によって表面性状処理が施され、インク受容層固化部１５によって固化される。 As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the base material 901 is supplied from the positive side in the x-axis direction and is transported toward the negative side in the x direction by the transport unit 16. In the middle of the conveyance, the ink receiving layer 902 is formed on the substrate 901 by the ink receiving layer forming unit 13. Further, after the formation of the ink receiving layer 902, as shown in FIG. 23, the ink receiving layer 902 on the substrate 901 is subjected to surface texture processing by the surface texture processing section 14 and solidified by the ink receiving layer solidifying section 15. The
　以下、各部について説明する。
　図２２に示すように、搬送部１６では、各搬送ローラー１６３は、それぞれ、第１実施形態での矢印α１６３方向と反対の矢印β１６３方向に回転する。これにより、基材９０１をｘ方向負側に向かって搬送することができる。 Hereinafter, each part will be described.
As shown in FIG. 22, in the transport unit 16, each transport roller 163 rotates in the direction of arrow β163 opposite to the direction of arrow α163 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the base material 901 can be conveyed toward the x direction negative side.
　インク受容層形成部１３では、転写部１３４は、第１実施形態での矢印α１３４方向と反対の矢印β１３４方向（反時計回り）に回転する。そして、転写ニップ１３５（転写部１３４上）では、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは反対方向である。これにより、転写ニップ１３５では、繊維含有材料は、感光体１３１にほとんど残らずに、ほぼ全てが基材９０１上に移動することができる。その結果、インク受容層９０２は、できる限り厚い層となって形成されることとなる。なお、このインク受容層９０２の厚さとしては、例えば、１０μｍ以上が可能であり、好ましくは１０μｍ以上１００μｍ以下が可能である。また、インク受容層９０２での筋ムラ等の発生を抑制または防止することができる。さらに、繊維含有材料の無駄も防止することができる。 In the ink receiving layer forming unit 13, the transfer unit 134 rotates in the arrow β134 direction (counterclockwise) opposite to the arrow α134 direction in the first embodiment. In the transfer nip 135 (on the transfer unit 134), the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) is opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16. As a result, in the transfer nip 135, almost all of the fiber-containing material can be moved onto the base material 901 while hardly remaining on the photoreceptor 131. As a result, the ink receiving layer 902 is formed as thick as possible. The thickness of the ink receiving layer 902 can be, for example, 10 μm or more, and preferably 10 μm or more and 100 μm or less. Further, the occurrence of streak unevenness or the like in the ink receiving layer 902 can be suppressed or prevented. Furthermore, waste of the fiber-containing material can be prevented.
　そして、転写ニップ１３５での、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送速度をＶ１３１（第１速度Ｖ１）、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送速度をＶ１６（第２速度Ｖ２）としたとき、｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。 The transfer speed of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) at the transfer nip 135 is V131 (first speed V1), and the transfer speed of the substrate 901 by the transfer unit 16 is V16 (second speed V2). It is preferable that the relationship | V1 |> | V2 | is satisfied.
　また、速度Ｖ１３１と速度Ｖ１６との大小関係は、次の２つの条件（２式）のうちの少なくとも一方を満足するのが好ましい。 Moreover, it is preferable that the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 satisfies at least one of the following two conditions (formula 2).
　１つ目の条件は、｜Ｖ１３１｜／｜Ｖ１６｜＞１．２（すなわち、｜第１速度Ｖ１｜／｜第２速度Ｖ２｜＞１．２）なる関係を満足することである。
　２つ目の条件は、｜Ｖ１３１｜／｜Ｖ１６｜＜１５（すなわち｜第１速度Ｖ１｜／｜第２速度Ｖ２｜＜１５）なる関係を満足することである。 The first condition is to satisfy the relationship | V131 | / | V16 |> 1.2 (that is, | first speed V1 | / | second speed V2 |> 1.2).
The second condition is to satisfy the relationship of | V131 | / | V16 | <15 (that is, | first speed V1 | / | second speed V2 | <15).
　このような条件を満足することにより、できる限り厚いインク受容層９０２の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 By satisfying such conditions, the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
　図２３に示すように、均し処理部３では、均しローラー３１は、第１実施形態での矢印α３１方向と反対の矢印β３１方向（時計回り）に回転する。また、支持ローラー３２は、第１実施形態での矢印α３２方向と反対のβ３２方向（反時計回り）に回転する。このような均し処理部３により、均し処理を行なうことができる。 As shown in FIG. 23, in the leveling unit 3, the leveling roller 31 rotates in the arrow β31 direction (clockwise) opposite to the arrow α31 direction in the first embodiment. Further, the support roller 32 rotates in the β32 direction (counterclockwise) opposite to the arrow α32 direction in the first embodiment. Such a leveling processing unit 3 can perform leveling processing.
　加圧処理部４では、各加圧ローラー４１は、それぞれ、第１実施形態での矢印α４１方向と反対方向の矢印β４１方向に回転する。このような加圧処理部４により、加圧処理を行なうことができる。 In the pressure processing unit 4, each pressure roller 41 rotates in the direction of arrow β41 opposite to the direction of arrow α41 in the first embodiment. The pressurizing process can be performed by such a pressurizing unit 4.
　インク受容層固化部１５では、各固化ローラー１５１は、それぞれ、第１実施形態での矢印α１５１方向と反対方向の矢印β１５１方向に回転する。このようなインク受容層固化部１５により、インク受容層９０２の固化を行なうことができる。 In the ink receiving layer solidifying unit 15, each solidifying roller 151 rotates in the direction of arrow β151 opposite to the direction of arrow α151 in the first embodiment. The ink receiving layer 902 can be solidified by such an ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15.
　また、図示はしないが、本実施形態でも、前記第１実施形態と同様に、マーキング部形成部２０が例えばインク受容層固化部１５よりも下流側に配置されている。 Although not shown, in this embodiment as well, in the present embodiment, the marking portion forming portion 20 is disposed on the downstream side of the ink receiving layer solidifying portion 15, for example.
　＜第１２実施形態＞
　図２４は、第１２実施形態の記録媒体再生システムが備える記録媒体製造装置の上流側を示す垂直断面側面図である。 <Twelfth embodiment>
FIG. 24 is a vertical sectional side view showing the upstream side of the recording medium manufacturing apparatus provided in the recording medium reproducing system of the twelfth embodiment.
　以下、この図を参照して本発明の第１２実施形態に係る記録媒体製造装置、記録媒体の製造方法、記録媒体の再生方法、および記録媒体再生装置について説明するが、前述した実施形態との相違点を中心に説明し、同様の事項はその説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, a recording medium manufacturing apparatus, a recording medium manufacturing method, a recording medium reproducing method, and a recording medium reproducing apparatus according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to this figure. Differences will be mainly described, and description of similar matters will be omitted.
　記録媒体製造装置１Ｂは、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体である感光体１３１と、基材９０１を搬送する搬送部１６と、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１（担持体）から基材９０１に転写する転写部１３４と、を備え、感光体１３１（担持体）に担持されている繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、基材９０１に転写された繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足する。
　転写部１３４では、感光体１３１（担持体）による繊維含有材料の搬送方向ＣＤ１３１と、搬送部１６による基材９０１の搬送方向ＣＤ１６とは反対方向である。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus 1B is a photosensitive member 131 that is a carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, a conveyance unit 16 that conveys a substrate 901, and a fiber-containing material. A transfer unit 134 that transfers the material 131 (support) to the substrate 901, and transfers the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the photoreceptor 131 (support) to the substrate 901. When the weight per unit area of the prepared fiber-containing material is W2, the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0 is satisfied.
In the transfer unit 134, the conveyance direction CD131 of the fiber-containing material by the photosensitive member 131 (supporting member) is opposite to the conveyance direction CD16 of the base material 901 by the conveyance unit 16.
　また、記録媒体の製造方法は、セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持体である感光体１３１を介して担持して、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１（担持体）から基材９０１に転写する転写ステップを有し、感光体１３１（担持体）に担持されている繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、基材９０１に転写された繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足する。 In addition, a method for manufacturing a recording medium includes supporting a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material via a photosensitive member 131 that is a carrier, and the fiber-containing material from the photosensitive member 131 (carrier) to the substrate. W1 is the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material carried on the photosensitive member 131 (supporting body), and W1 is the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate 901. When W2 is W2, the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0 is satisfied.
　このような発明によれば、重量Ｗ１と重量Ｗ２との間に大小をつけるという簡単な構成で、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１から基材９０１に比較的多く転写することができる。これにより、繊維含有材料で構成されるインク受容層９０２をできる限り厚く（例えば１０μｍ以上）形成することができる。 According to such an invention, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be transferred from the photoreceptor 131 to the substrate 901 with a simple configuration in which the size is set between the weight W1 and the weight W2. Thereby, the ink receiving layer 902 made of a fiber-containing material can be formed as thick as possible (for example, 10 μm or more).
　図２４に示すように、感光体１３１（担持体）に担持されている繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量、すなわち、目付量（単位：ｇ／ｃｍ2）をＷ１、基材９０１に転写された繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量、すなわち、目付量（単位：ｇ／ｃｍ2）をＷ２としたとき、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。これにより、繊維含有材料を感光体１３１から基材９０１に比較的多く転写することができ、よって、インク受容層９０２をできる限り厚く形成することができる。なお、重量Ｗ１と重量Ｗ２との大小関係を満足させるには、例えば、感光体１３１での電位や転写部１３４での電位を調整することにより可能である。その他、速度Ｖ１３１、速度Ｖ１６の調整等によっても可能である。そして、このような電位調整や速度調整は、制御部１１によって制御されている。 As shown in FIG. 24, the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material supported on the photoreceptor 131 (support), that is, the basis weight (unit: g / cm 2 ) is transferred to W1 and the substrate 901. When the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material, that is, the basis weight (unit: g / cm 2 ) is W2, it is preferable to satisfy the relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0. As a result, a relatively large amount of the fiber-containing material can be transferred from the photoreceptor 131 to the substrate 901, and thus the ink receiving layer 902 can be formed as thick as possible. In order to satisfy the magnitude relationship between the weight W1 and the weight W2, it is possible to adjust the potential at the photoconductor 131 and the potential at the transfer unit 134, for example. In addition, it is possible by adjusting the speed V131 and the speed V16. Such potential adjustment and speed adjustment are controlled by the control unit 11.
　さらに、Ｗ２／Ｗ１＜１５なる関係を満足するのが好ましい。これにより、できる限り厚いインク受容層９０２の形成を安定して迅速に行なうことができる。 Furthermore, it is preferable to satisfy the relationship W2 / W1 <15. Accordingly, the ink receiving layer 902 that is as thick as possible can be stably and quickly formed.
　なお、インク受容層形成部１３では、重量Ｗ１と重量Ｗ２との大小関係の条件と、前述した速度Ｖ１３１と速度Ｖ１６との大小関係の条件との双方を満足することもできる。 The ink receiving layer forming unit 13 can also satisfy both the condition of the magnitude relationship between the weight W1 and the weight W2 and the condition of the magnitude relationship between the speed V131 and the speed V16 described above.
　以上、本発明の記録媒体の製造方法および記録媒体製造装置を図示の実施形態について説明したが、本発明は、これに限定されるものではない。また、記録媒体再生装置を構成する各部は、同様の機能を発揮し得る任意の構成のものと置換することができる。また、任意の構成物が付加されていてもよい。 The recording medium manufacturing method and the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of the present invention have been described above with respect to the illustrated embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, each unit constituting the recording medium reproducing device can be replaced with any unit that can exhibit the same function. Moreover, arbitrary components may be added.
　また、本発明の記録媒体の製造方法および記録媒体製造装置は、前記各実施形態のうちの、任意の２以上の構成（特徴）を組み合わせたものであってもよい。 Also, the recording medium manufacturing method and the recording medium manufacturing apparatus of the present invention may be a combination of any two or more configurations (features) of the above embodiments.
　また、インク受容層の構成材料の一部である熱可塑性樹脂としては、前記第１実施形態ではガラス転移温度が５０℃以上２００℃以下のものを用いているが、これに限定されず、例えば、融点が５０℃以上２００℃以下のものを用いてもよい。 In addition, as the thermoplastic resin that is a part of the constituent material of the ink receiving layer, a resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or more and 200 ° C. or less is used in the first embodiment. A material having a melting point of 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower may be used.
　また、インク受容層は、前記第１実施形態では基材の第１面に対して余白部を残して形成されている、すなわち、基材の第１面の一部に形成されているが、これに限定されず、基材の第１面の全面に形成されていてもよい。 In the first embodiment, the ink receiving layer is formed leaving a blank portion with respect to the first surface of the base material, that is, formed on a part of the first surface of the base material. It is not limited to this, You may form in the whole surface of the 1st surface of a base material.
　また、インク受容層は、単層であるのに限定されず、例えば、積層体であってもよい。また、記録媒体は、基材とインク受容層との間に下地層が設けられたものであってもよい。 Further, the ink receiving layer is not limited to a single layer, and may be a laminate, for example. The recording medium may be one in which a base layer is provided between the base material and the ink receiving layer.
　また、ステップＳ１０１（材料除去ステップ（第１ステップ））では、記録媒体から複合体（情報記録材料）の除去をする際に、切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの１つを用いているが、これに限定されず、例えば、切削、スクレイプ、研削および研磨のうちの２つ以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。そして、この組み合わせに応じて、バイト、スクレイパー、フラップブラシ、弾性グラインダーのうちの少なくとも１つを適宜選択して用いるのが好ましい。 In step S101 (material removal step (first step)), one of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing is used to remove the composite (information recording material) from the recording medium. For example, two or more of cutting, scraping, grinding and polishing may be used in combination. And according to this combination, it is preferable to select and use at least one of a bite, a scraper, a flap brush, and an elastic grinder as appropriate.
　また、前記第１実施形態では、ステップＳ１０１でバイトを用いていたが、これに限定されず、例えば、研削砥粒を焼結させた回転砥石や、エンドミル等のような回転切削刃物等を用いてもよい。 Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although the cutting tool was used by step S101, it is not limited to this, For example, the rotary grindstone which sintered the abrasive grain, the rotary cutting blades, such as an end mill, etc. are used. May be.
　また、ステップＳ１０２（層形成ステップ）では、基材への繊維含有材料の塗布を静電塗布により行なっているが、これに限定されない。 In step S102 (layer formation step), the fiber-containing material is applied to the base material by electrostatic application, but is not limited thereto.
　また、ステップＳ１０３（表面性状処理）は、前記第１実施形態では均し処理、加圧処理、半固化処理の３つの処理を含んでいるが、これに限定されず、例えば、これら３つの処理のうちの１つの処理でもよいし、２つの処理を組み合わせてもよい。 Step S103 (surface texture treatment) includes three treatments of leveling treatment, pressure treatment, and semi-solidification treatment in the first embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, these three treatments One of these processes may be used, or two processes may be combined.
　また、前記第１実施形態では、ステップＳ１０２以降は、例えば公知の技術を用いることもできる。
　また、材料除去部は、超音波カッターを有するものであってもよい。 In the first embodiment, for example, a known technique can be used after step S102.
The material removing unit may have an ultrasonic cutter.
　また、インク受容層の形成は、前記第１実施形態では基材の第１面および第２面のうちの第１面に対して行なっているが、これに限定されず、例えば、第２面に対しても行なってもよい。この場合の第２面へのインク受容層の形成は、例えば、インク受容層を第１面に形成した後に、基材を表裏反転させて、第１面へのインク受容層の形成と同じ工程を経ることにより可能となる。 In addition, in the first embodiment, the ink receiving layer is formed on the first surface of the first surface and the second surface of the base material. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May also be performed. In this case, for example, the ink receiving layer is formed on the second surface. For example, after forming the ink receiving layer on the first surface, the substrate is turned upside down to form the ink receiving layer on the first surface. It becomes possible by going through.
　また、インク受容層が基材の第１面および第２面の双方に形成されている場合、各インク受容層を除去するには、例えば、まず、第１面からインク受容層を除去した後に、基材を表裏反転させる。次いで、第２面からインク受容層を除去するに際し、第１面からのインク受容層の除去と同じ工程を経ることにより、その除去が可能となる。その他、第２面からインク受容層を除去するに際し、第１面からのインク受容層の除去と同時に、その除去を行なってもよい。 Further, when the ink receiving layer is formed on both the first surface and the second surface of the base material, in order to remove each ink receiving layer, for example, first, after removing the ink receiving layer from the first surface The base material is turned upside down. Next, when the ink receiving layer is removed from the second surface, the removal is possible through the same process as the removal of the ink receiving layer from the first surface. In addition, when removing the ink receiving layer from the second surface, the ink receiving layer may be removed simultaneously with the removal of the ink receiving layer from the first surface.
　次に、本発明にかかる具体的な第１実施例から第３実施例について説明する。 Next, specific first to third embodiments according to the present invention will be described.
　［第１実施例］
　まず、第１実施例について説明する。 [First embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described.
　１．繊維含有材料Ａの形成
　平均長さ（長径）が１８μｍ、平均幅（短径）が９μｍのセルロース繊維と、ポリエステル樹脂（ガラス転移温度：５６℃、分子量：１００００）で構成され、粒径が１μｍ～４０μｍの粉体とを、２：８（重量比）で空気中で混合した後、加熱処理によってポリエステル樹脂をセルロース繊維に融着させて複合化した。次いで、この複合化したものに、表面が疎水化処理された二酸化珪素微粒子を重量比で１．５％になるように加えて、卓上ブレンダーに投入し、翼端速度３０ｍ／ｓで６０秒間攪拌処理した。なお、疎水化処理した無機微粒子の効果は、安息角の減少および帯電量の変化により確認することができる。通常、セルロース繊維は、比較的正帯電し易い材料であるが、ポリエステル樹脂と複合化し、この複合体を無機微粒子でコーティングすることにより負帯電し易くなる。この場合、平均帯電量は、－６μＣ／ｇであった。 1. Formation of fiber-containing material A The fiber-containing material A is composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 μm and an average width (minor axis) of 9 μm, and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000). A powder of ˜40 μm was mixed in air at a ratio of 2: 8 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to cellulose fibers by heat treatment to form a composite. Next, silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed. In addition, the effect of the hydrophobized inorganic fine particles can be confirmed by a decrease in the angle of repose and a change in charge amount. Usually, cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles. In this case, the average charge amount was −6 μC / g.
　２．記録媒体の形成
　（実施例１）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：時計回り
　　バイアス　　：－３３０Ｖ
　　周速度　　　：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ３０ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：反時計回り
　　バイアス　　：３０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：時計回り
　　バイアス　　：１３８０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４７．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．１μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　加圧力　　　：１００ｋｇ／Ａ４サイズ
　　表面温度　　：１７０℃
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１０．１μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例１における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．２１であった。 2. Formation of recording medium (Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
-The conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V
Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ30mm
Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 30V
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Direction of rotation: clockwise Bias: 1380V
Peripheral speed (V2): 147.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 12.1 μm.
-The conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows.
Pressure: 100kg / A4 size Surface temperature: 170 ° C
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 10.1 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 1 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.21.
　（実施例２）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：５９．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは３２．４μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に２７．２μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝３．００であった。 (Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 59.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 32.4 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 of 27.2 μm was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 2 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 3.00.
　（実施例３）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：２９．８ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは６４．８μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に５４．４μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝６．００であった。 (Example 3)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 29.8 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 64.8 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 54.4 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 3 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 6.00.
　（実施例４）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４．９ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１１９．５μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１００．４μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例４における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１２．００であった。 Example 4
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 14.9 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 119.5 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 of 100.4 μm was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 4 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 12.00.
　（実施例５）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１２．０ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１１９．８μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１００．６μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例５における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１４．９０であった。 (Example 5)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 12.0mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 119.8 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 of 100.6 μm was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 5 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 14.90.
　（比較例１）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは８．０μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に６．８μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例１における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．００であった。 (Comparative Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 8.0 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 6.8 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 1 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.00.
　（比較例２）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１６２．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは９．６μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に８．１μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．１０であった。 (Comparative Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 162.3 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 9.6 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an 8.1 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 2 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.10.
　（比較例３）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２０及び図２１参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１０．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１１２．２μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に９４．２μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１７．００であった。
　ここで、上記実施例１から実施例５及び比較例１から比較例３における｜Ｖ１｜は感光体１３１における繊維含有材料の搬送速度に対応し、｜Ｖ２｜は転写部１３４における基材の搬送速度に対応する。 (Comparative Example 3)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 12.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 10.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 112.2 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 94.2 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 3 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 17.00.
Here, | V1 | in Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 corresponds to the conveyance speed of the fiber-containing material in the photoreceptor 131, and | V2 | Corresponds to speed.
　３．評価方法及び判断方法
　次いで、上記実施例１から実施例５及び比較例１から比較例３において、均一性むら、吸収性及び堅牢性の評価を行い、全評価結果に基づいて総合的に合否を判断した。 3. Evaluation Method and Judgment Method Next, in Example 1 to Example 5 and Comparative Example 1 to Comparative Example 3, the uniformity unevenness, absorbency and fastness are evaluated, and overall acceptance is determined based on the overall evaluation results. It was judged.
　（ａ）均一性むらの評価方法について
　均一性むらの評価は、転写効率及び転写抜けについて評価する。
　転写効率は、感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の目付量に対する基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の目付量の比率である。すなわち、転写効率は、感光体１３１から基材９０１への繊維含有材料の転写され具合を評価するものである。従って、転写効率が高い場合は評価が高くなり、転写効率が低い場合は評価が低くなる。
　転写抜けは、基材９０１に繊維含有材料が転写された際、基材９０１上の繊維含有材料の塊の抜け状態を評価する。この際、顕微鏡を用いて観察する。そして、転写抜けの評価結果は点数で表わす。この場合、転写抜けが少ない場合は評価が高くなり、転写抜けが多い場合は評価が低くなる。
　具体的には、以下の通りの点数となる。
　大きな塊の抜けが多数存在する場合　　　：１（点）
　中くらいの塊の抜けが多数存在する場合　：２（点）
　小さな塊の抜けが多数存在する場合　　　：３（点）
　小さな塊の抜けが少数存在する場合　　　：４（点）
　小さな塊の抜けもほとんど無い場合　　　：５（点） (A) About evaluation method of uniformity unevenness Evaluation of uniformity unevenness evaluates transfer efficiency and transfer omission.
The transfer efficiency is the ratio of the basis weight of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 to the basis weight of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131. That is, the transfer efficiency is an evaluation of how the fiber-containing material is transferred from the photoreceptor 131 to the base material 901. Therefore, the evaluation is high when the transfer efficiency is high, and the evaluation is low when the transfer efficiency is low.
In the transfer omission, when the fiber-containing material is transferred to the base material 901, the omission state of the lump of the fiber-containing material on the base material 901 is evaluated. At this time, observation is performed using a microscope. The evaluation result of transfer omission is expressed by a score. In this case, the evaluation is high when there are few transfer omissions, and the evaluation is low when there are many transfer omissions.
Specifically, the score is as follows.
When there are many missing large chunks: 1 (point)
When there are a lot of medium lumps: 2 (points)
When there are many small chunks missing: 3 (points)
When there are a few small chunks missing: 4 (points)
When there is almost no missing small chunk: 5 (points)
　（ｂ）吸収性の評価方法について
　吸収性の評価は、形成された記録媒体にインクを吐出して印字し、記録媒体上の印字におけるインク染み出し及び繊維にじみについて評価する。
　インク染み出しは、印字の輪郭の鮮明さを評価するものである。従って、インク染み出しが小さい場合は評価が高くなり、インク染み出しが大きい場合は評価が低くなる。
　また、繊維にじみは、印字の輪郭を構成する記録媒体の繊維へのインクのにじみの程度を評価するものである。従って、繊維にじみ少ない場合は評価が高くなり、繊維にじみが多い場合は評価が低くなる。インク染み出し及び繊維にじみは、顕微鏡を用いて観察する。
　そして、上記評価は記録媒体の面積に対して１０％の面積に印字した場合（印字１０％）と、記録媒体の面積に対して５０％の面積に印字した場合（印字５０％）と、で評価する。
　具体的には、各印字比率に対して以下の通りの点数となる。
　インク染み出しが大、繊維にじみが多数の場合　　　：１（点）
　インク染み出しが大、繊維にじみが中の場合　　　　：２（点）
　インク染み出しが中、繊維にじみが中の場合　　　　：３（点）
　インク染み出しが小、繊維にじみが小数の場合　　　：４（点）
　インク染み出しが微小、繊維にじみが小数の場合　　：５（点） (B) About the evaluation method of absorptivity In the absorptivity evaluation, ink is ejected onto the formed recording medium and printing is performed, and ink bleeding and fiber bleeding in printing on the recording medium are evaluated.
Ink ooze-out evaluates the sharpness of the printed outline. Therefore, the evaluation is high when the ink exudation is small, and the evaluation is low when the ink exudation is large.
Further, the fiber bleeding is an evaluation of the degree of ink bleeding on the fibers of the recording medium constituting the outline of printing. Accordingly, the evaluation is high when the fiber is less blurred, and the evaluation is lower when the fiber is heavily blurred. Ink bleeding and fiber bleeding are observed using a microscope.
The above evaluation is performed when printing is performed on an area of 10% with respect to the area of the recording medium (printing 10%) and when printing is performed on an area of 50% with respect to the area of the recording medium (printing 50%). evaluate.
Specifically, the score is as follows for each printing ratio.
When ink bleeding is large and fiber bleeding is large: 1 (point)
When ink bleeding is large and fiber bleeding is inside: 2 (dots)
When ink ooze out and fiber bleed out: 3 (dot)
When ink bleeding is small and fiber bleeding is small: 4 (dots)
When ink exudation is minute and fiber bleeding is small: 5 (points)
　（ｃ）堅牢性の評価方法について
　堅牢性の評価は、形成された記録媒体にインクを吐出して印字し、印字した部分を砂消しゴムで５回擦る。そして、市販の光学濃度計を用いて擦過前後の印字部分の光学濃度値の比率（×１００）で評価する。従って、光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が高い場合は評価が高くなり、光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が低い場合は評価が低くなる。
　具体的には、以下の通りの点数となる。
　光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が５０以下の場合　　　：１（点）
　光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が６０～６９の場合　　：２（点）
　光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が７０～７９の場合　　：３（点）
　光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が８０～８９の場合　　：４（点）
　光学濃度値の比率（×１００）が９０以上の場合　　　：５（点） (C) Method for evaluating fastness To evaluate fastness, ink is ejected onto the formed recording medium for printing, and the printed portion is rubbed with sand eraser five times. And it evaluates by the ratio (x100) of the optical density value of the printing part before and behind rubbing using a commercially available optical densitometer. Accordingly, the evaluation is high when the optical density value ratio (× 100) is high, and the evaluation is low when the optical density value ratio (× 100) is low.
Specifically, the score is as follows.
When the ratio of optical density values (× 100) is 50 or less: 1 (point)
When the ratio of optical density values (× 100) is 60 to 69: 2 (points)
When the ratio of optical density values (× 100) is 70 to 79: 3 (points)
When the optical density value ratio (× 100) is 80 to 89: 4 (points)
When the optical density value ratio (× 100) is 90 or more: 5 (points)
　（ｄ）判断方法
　転写抜けの点数と、吸収性における印字１０％時の点数と、吸収性における印字５０％時の点数と、堅牢性の点数と、を加算する。そして、加算した値を４で除する。その結果値に基づいて合否判断される。
　具体的には、以下の通りである。
　４（点）未満の場合　：不合格
　４（点）以上の場合　：合格 (D) Judgment method The score of transfer omission, the score at 10% printing in absorbency, the score at 50% printing in absorbency, and the robustness score are added. Then, the added value is divided by 4. A pass / fail decision is made based on the result value.
Specifically, it is as follows.
If it is less than 4 (points): Fail If it is 4 (points) or more: Pass
　４．結果
　評価結果及び判断結果は、表１の通りである。 4). Results Table 1 shows the evaluation results and judgment results.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
　表１に示すように、実施例１から実施例５における速度比が１．２＜｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＜１５では、均一性むら、吸収性、堅牢性の全ての評価項目において点数が高く、合格判断となった。一方、比較例１及び比較例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜が１．２以下と、比較例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜が１５以上の場合は、不合格となった。 As shown in Table 1, when the speed ratio in Example 1 to Example 5 is 1.2 <| V1 | / | V2 | <15, scores are obtained for all evaluation items of uniformity uniformity, absorbency, and fastness. It was high and passed. On the other hand, when the speed ratio | V1 | / | V2 | in Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 is 1.2 or less and the speed ratio | V1 | / | V2 | It was.
　［第２実施例］
　次に、第２実施例について説明する。 [Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described.
　１．繊維含有材料Ｂの形成
　平均長さ（長径）が１８μｍ、平均幅（短径）が９μｍのセルロース繊維と、ポリエステル樹脂（ガラス転移温度：５６℃、分子量：１００００）で構成され、粒径が１μｍ～４０μｍの粉体とを、１．５：８．５（重量比）で空気中で混合した後、加熱処理によってポリエステル樹脂をセルロース繊維に融着させて複合化した。次いで、この複合化したものに、表面が疎水化処理された二酸化珪素微粒子を重量比で１．５％になるように加えて、卓上ブレンダーに投入し、翼端速度３０ｍ／ｓで６０秒間攪拌処理した。なお、疎水化処理した無機微粒子の効果は、安息角の減少および帯電量の変化により確認することができる。通常、セルロース繊維は、比較的正帯電し易い材料であるが、ポリエステル樹脂と複合化し、この複合体を無機微粒子でコーティングすることにより負帯電し易くなる。この場合、平均帯電量は、－４．５μＣ／ｇであった。 1. Formation of fiber-containing material B The fiber-containing material B is composed of cellulose fibers having an average length (major axis) of 18 μm and an average width (minor axis) of 9 μm, and a polyester resin (glass transition temperature: 56 ° C., molecular weight: 10,000). The powder of ˜40 μm was mixed in air at 1.5: 8.5 (weight ratio), and then the polyester resin was fused to the cellulose fiber by heat treatment to form a composite. Next, silicon dioxide fine particles whose surface is hydrophobized are added to the composite so that the weight ratio is 1.5%, and the mixture is put into a table-top blender and stirred for 60 seconds at a blade tip speed of 30 m / s. Processed. In addition, the effect of the hydrophobized inorganic fine particles can be confirmed by a decrease in the angle of repose and a change in charge amount. Usually, cellulose fiber is a material that is relatively easy to be positively charged, but it becomes easy to be negatively charged by forming a composite with a polyester resin and coating the composite with inorganic fine particles. In this case, the average charge amount was −4.5 μC / g.
　２．記録媒体の形成
　（実施例１）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：時計回り
　　バイアス　　：－３３０Ｖ
　　周速度　　　：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ３０ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：反時計回り
　　バイアス　　：３０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：反時計回り
　　バイアス　　：１３８０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４７．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．０μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　加圧力　　　：１００ｋｇ／Ａ４サイズ
　　表面温度　　：１７０℃
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１０．１μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例１における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．２１であった。 2. Formation of recording medium (Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
-The conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V
Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ30mm
Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 30V
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 1380V
Peripheral speed (V2): 147.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the base material 901 was 12.0 μm.
-The conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows.
Pressure: 100kg / A4 size Surface temperature: 170 ° C
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 10.1 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 1 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.21.
　（実施例２）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１３７．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２．９μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１０．８μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．３０であった。 (Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 137.3 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 12.9 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 of 10.8 μm was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 2 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.30.
　（実施例３）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：５９．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは２９．７μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に２４．９μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝３．００であった。 (Example 3)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 59.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the base material 901 was 29.7 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 24.9 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 3 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 3.00.
　（実施例４）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：２９．８ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは５９．４μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に４９．９μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例４における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝６．００であった。 Example 4
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 29.8 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 59.4 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 49.9 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 4 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 6.00.
　（実施例５）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４．９ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１１１．６μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に９３．７μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例５における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１２．００であった。 (Example 5)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 14.9 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 111.6 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 93.7 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 5 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 12.00.
　（実施例６）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１２．０ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１２１．４μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に１０２．０μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例６における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１４．９０であった。 (Example 6)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 12.0mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 121.4 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 of 102.0 μm was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Example 6 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 14.90.
　（比較例１）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは８．５μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に７．１μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例１における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．００であった。 (Comparative Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 8.5 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 7.1 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 1 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.00.
　（比較例２）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１６２．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは９．８μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に８．２μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１．１０であった。 (Comparative Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 162.3 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 9.8 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an 8.2 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 2 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 1.10.
　（比較例３）
　繊維含有材料Ｂを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２２及び図２３参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１０．０μｍであった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１０．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上における繊維含有材料の厚さは１１０．５μｍであった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１上に９２．８μｍのインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＝１７．００であった。
　ここで、上記実施例１から実施例６及び比較例１から比較例３における｜Ｖ１｜は感光体１３１における繊維含有材料の搬送速度に対応し、｜Ｖ２｜は転写部１３４における基材の搬送速度に対応する。 (Comparative Example 3)
Using the fiber-containing material B, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed by a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131 was 10.0 μm.
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 10.5 mm / s
At this time, the thickness of the fiber-containing material on the substrate 901 was 110.5 μm.
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having a 92.8 μm ink receiving layer 902 was formed on the substrate 901.
The speed ratio in Comparative Example 3 was | V1 | / | V2 | = 17.00.
Here, | V1 | in Examples 1 to 6 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 corresponds to the conveyance speed of the fiber-containing material on the photoreceptor 131, and | V2 | Corresponds to speed.
　３．評価方法及び判断方法
　次いで、上記実施例１から実施例６、比較例１から比較例３において、均一性むら、吸収性、堅牢性の評価を行い、全評価結果に基づいて総合的に合否を判断した。
　なお、均一性むら、吸収性及び堅牢性の評価方法、判断方法については第１実施例と同様なので説明を省略する。 3. Evaluation Method and Judgment Method Next, in Example 1 to Example 6 and Comparative Example 1 to Comparative Example 3, the uniformity unevenness, absorbability, and robustness are evaluated, and overall acceptance is determined based on the overall evaluation results. It was judged.
In addition, since the evaluation method and determination method of uniformity unevenness, absorptivity, and fastness are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.
　４．結果
　評価結果及び判断結果は、表２の通りである。 4). Results Table 2 shows the evaluation results and the judgment results.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
　表２に示すように、実施例１から実施例６における速度比１．２＜｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＜１５では、均一性むら、吸収性、堅牢性の全ての評価項目において点数が高く、合格判断となった。一方、比較例１及び比較例２における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜が１．２以下と、比較例３における速度比｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜が１５以上の場合は、不合格となった。 As shown in Table 2, when the speed ratio of Example 1 to Example 6 is 1.2 <| V1 | / | V2 | <15, the scores are high in all evaluation items of uniformity uniformity, absorbency, and fastness. It became a pass judgment. On the other hand, when the speed ratio | V1 | / | V2 | in Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 is 1.2 or less and the speed ratio | V1 | / | V2 | It was.
　［第３実施例］
　次に、第３実施例について説明する。 [Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described.
　１．繊維含有材料Ａ
　繊維含有材料Ａの形成については第１実施例と同様なので説明を省略する。 1. Fiber-containing material A
The formation of the fiber-containing material A is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.
　２．記録媒体の形成
　（実施例１）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４参照）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：時計回り
　　バイアス　　：－３３０Ｖ
　　周速度　　　：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ３０ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：反時計回り
　　バイアス　　：３０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　外径：φ１６ｍｍ
　　回転方向　　：反時計回り
　　バイアス　　：１３８０Ｖ
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量Ｗ２）は０．３９ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は以下の通り。
　　加圧力　　　：１００ｋｇ／Ａ４サイズ
　　表面温度　　：１７０℃
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が０．３９ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例１における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１．０３であった。 2. Formation of recording medium (Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (see FIG. 24).
-The conditions of the layer formation roller 24 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Rotation direction: Clockwise bias: -330V
Peripheral speed: 178.5 mm / s
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ30mm
Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 30V
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The various conditions of the transfer unit 134 are as follows.
Outer diameter: φ16mm
Rotation direction: Counterclockwise Bias: 1380V
Peripheral speed (V2): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 0.39 mg / cm 2 .
-The conditions of the solidification roller 151 are as follows.
Pressure: 100kg / A4 size Surface temperature: 170 ° C
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 0.39 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Example 1 was W2 / W1 = 1.03.
　（実施例２）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１６２．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は０．４２ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が０．４２ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例２における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１．１１であった。 (Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 162.3 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the base material 901 was 0.42 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 0.42 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Example 2 was W2 / W1 = 1.11.
　（実施例３）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４８．８ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は０．４６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が０．４６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例３における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１．２１であった。 (Example 3)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 148.8 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 0.46 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 0.46 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio W2 / W1 in Example 3 was 1.21.
　（実施例４）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１３７．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は０．４９ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が０．４９ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例４における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１．２９であった。 Example 4
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 137.3 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 0.49 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 0.49 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Example 4 was W2 / W1 = 1.29.
　（実施例５）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：５９．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は１．１４ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が１．１４ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例５における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝３．００であった。 (Example 5)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 59.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the base material 901 was 1.14 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 1.14 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio W2 / W1 in Example 5 was 3.00.
　（実施例６）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：２９．８ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は２．２８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が２．２８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例６における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝６．００であった。 (Example 6)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 29.8 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the base material 901 was 2.28 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 2.28 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio W2 / W1 in Example 6 was 6.00.
　（実施例７）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１４．９ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は４．５６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が４．５６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例７における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１２．００であった。 (Example 7)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 14.9 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 4.56 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 with a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 4.56 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio W2 / W1 in Example 7 was 12.00.
　（実施例８）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１２．０ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は５．６６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が５．６６ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、実施例８における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１４．８９であった。 (Example 8)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 12.0mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the base material 901 was 5.66 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 5.66 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Example 8 was W2 / W1 = 14.89.
　（比較例１）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１９８．３ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は０．３０ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が０．３０ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例１における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝０．７９であった。 (Comparative Example 1)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 198.3 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 0.30 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 0.30 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Comparative Example 1 was W2 / W1 = 0.79.
　（比較例２）
　繊維含有材料Ａを用いて記録媒体製造装置（図２４）で記録媒体（ＰＰＣ用紙を基材とするＡ４サイズのシート）を形成した。
　・層形成ローラー２４の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　・感光体１３１の諸条件は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ１）：１７８．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの感光体１３１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ１）は０．３８ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・転写部１３４の諸条件は、周速度以外は実施例１と同様である。
　　周速度（Ｖ２）：１０．５ｍｍ／ｓ
　　このときの基材９０１上の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量：Ｗ２）は５．８１ｍｇ／ｃｍ2であった。
　・固化ローラー１５１の諸条件は、実施例１と同様である。
　以上の条件により、基材９０１の単位面積当たりの繊維含有材料の重量（目付量）が５．８１ｍｇ／ｃｍ2のインク受容層９０２を有する記録媒体を形成した。
　なお、比較例２における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１＝１５．２９であった。 (Comparative Example 2)
Using the fiber-containing material A, a recording medium (A4 size sheet based on PPC paper) was formed with a recording medium manufacturing apparatus (FIG. 24).
The conditions for the layer forming roller 24 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The various conditions of the photoreceptor 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Peripheral speed (V1): 178.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W1) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the photoreceptor 131 was 0.38 mg / cm 2 .
The conditions of the transfer unit 134 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the peripheral speed.
Peripheral speed (V2): 10.5 mm / s
At this time, the weight (weight per unit area: W2) of the fiber-containing material per unit area on the substrate 901 was 5.81 mg / cm 2 .
-Various conditions of the solidification roller 151 are the same as that of Example 1.
Under the above conditions, a recording medium having an ink receiving layer 902 having a weight (weight per unit area) of the fiber-containing material per unit area of the substrate 901 of 5.81 mg / cm 2 was formed.
The weight ratio in Comparative Example 2 was W2 / W1 = 15.29.
　３．評価方法及び判断方法
　次いで、上記実施例１から実施例８、比較例１及び比較例２において、均一性むら、吸収性、堅牢性の評価を行い、全評価結果に基づいて総合的に合否を判断した。
　なお、均一性むら、吸収性及び堅牢性の評価方法、判断方法については第１実施例と同様なので説明を省略する。 3. Evaluation Method and Judgment Method Next, in Example 1 to Example 8, Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2, evaluation of uniformity unevenness, absorbability, and robustness is performed, and overall pass / fail is determined based on all evaluation results. It was judged.
In addition, since the evaluation method and determination method of uniformity unevenness, absorptivity, and fastness are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.
　４．結果
　評価結果及び判断結果は、表３の通りである。 4). Results Table 3 shows the evaluation results and the judgment results.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
　表３に示すように、実施例１から実施例８における重量比１．０＜Ｗ２／Ｗ１＜１５では、均一性むら、吸収性、堅牢性の全ての評価項目において点数が高く、合格判断となった。一方、比較例１における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１が１．０以下と、比較例２における重量比Ｗ２／Ｗ１が１５以上の場合は、不合格となった。 As shown in Table 3, at a weight ratio of 1.0 <W2 / W1 <15 in Example 1 to Example 8, scores were high in all evaluation items of uniformity uniformity, absorbency, and fastness, became. On the other hand, when the weight ratio W2 / W1 in Comparative Example 1 was 1.0 or less and the weight ratio W2 / W1 in Comparative Example 2 was 15 or more, it was rejected.
　１００…記録媒体再生システム、１Ａ…記録媒体再生装置、１Ｂ…記録媒体製造装置、２…材料供給部、２１…貯留部、２２…攪拌機（アジテーター）、２３…供給ローラー、２４…層形成ローラー、２５…ブレード、３…均し処理部、３１…均しローラー、３２…支持ローラー、３３…アース線、３４…スクレイパー、３５…台座、３６…均しローラー、３６１…溝、３７…回転支持部、４…加圧処理部、４１…加圧ローラー、４１１…外周部、５…半固化処理部、５１…チャンバー、５１１…断熱壁、５１２…入口、５１３…出口、５２…ヒーター、５３…ヒーター、６…弾性グラインダー、６１…弾性膜、７…搬送部、７２…第１搬送ローラー、７３…第２搬送ローラー、８…支持ローラー（プラテンローラー）、１１…制御部、１１１…ＣＰＵ（中央演算処理部）、１１２…記憶部、１２…材料除去部、１２１…回転ドラム、１２１ａ…内腔部、１２１ｂ…吸引孔、１２２…バイト、１２３…ポンプ、１２４…連結部、１２５…フラップブラシ、１２５ａ…不織布、１２６…スクレイパー、１２６ａ…ヒーター、１３…インク受容層形成部、１３１…感光体、１３１ａ…外周面、１３２…帯電部、１３３…露光部、１３４…転写部、１３４ａ…外周面、１３５…転写ニップ、１３６…転写部、１４…表面性状処理部、１５…インク受容層固化部、１５１…固化ローラー、１５２…ヒーター、１６…搬送部、１６１…搬送ベルト、１６２…搬送ローラー、１６３…搬送ローラー、１７…トレイ、１８…担持体、１８１…コア、１８２…誘電体層、１９…層形成ローラー、２０…マーキング部形成部、９０…記録媒体、９０’…記録媒体、９０１…基材、９０２…インク受容層、９０２ａ…表面、９０３…余白部、９０４…マーキング部、９０５…第１面、９０６…第２面、ＣＤ１３１…搬送方向、ＣＤ１６…搬送方向、Ｆ６…研削力、Ｆ７２…第１挟持力、Ｆ７３…第２挟持力、Ｆ１２１…吸引力、ＬＢ１３３…レーザー光、Ｓ１０１～Ｓ１０４…ステップ、Ｖ３１…速度、Ｖ６…第３速度、Ｖ７２…第１速度、Ｖ７３…第２速度、Ｖ１３１…速度、Ｖ１６…速度、Ｗ１…重量、Ｗ２…重量、α６…矢印、α８…矢印、α１９…矢印、α２２…矢印、α２３…矢印、α２４…矢印、α３１…矢印、α３２…矢印、α３４…矢印、α４１…矢印、α７２…矢印、α７３…矢印、α１２１…矢印、α１２２…矢印、α１２５…矢印、α１３１…矢印、α１３２…矢印、α１３４…矢印、α１５１…矢印、α１６２…矢印、α１６３…矢印、α１８…矢印、β３１…矢印、β３２…矢印、β４１…矢印、β１３４…矢印、β１５１…矢印、β１６２…矢印。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Recording medium reproduction | regeneration system, 1A ... Recording medium reproduction | regeneration apparatus, 1B ... Recording medium manufacturing apparatus, 2 ... Material supply part, 21 ... Storage part, 22 ... Stirrer (agitator), 23 ... Supply roller, 24 ... Layer formation roller, 25 ... Blade, 3 ... Leveling processing unit, 31 ... Leveling roller, 32 ... Support roller, 33 ... Ground wire, 34 ... Scraper, 35 ... Pedestal, 36 ... Leveling roller, 361 ... Groove, 37 ... Rotation support unit DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 ... Pressure processing part, 41 ... Pressure roller, 411 ... Outer peripheral part, 5 ... Semi-solidification processing part, 51 ... Chamber, 511 ... Thermal insulation wall, 512 ... Inlet, 513 ... Outlet, 52 ... Heater, 53 ... Heater , 6 ... elastic grinder, 61 ... elastic film, 7 ... transport unit, 72 ... first transport roller, 73 ... second transport roller, 8 ... support roller (platen roller), 11 ... control unit, 1 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... CPU (central processing part), 112 ... Storage | storage part, 12 ... Material removal part, 121 ... Rotary drum, 121a ... Inner cavity part, 121b ... Suction hole, 122 ... Bite, 123 ... Pump, 124 ... Connecting part, 125 ... flap brush, 125a ... non-woven fabric, 126 ... scraper, 126a ... heater, 13 ... ink receiving layer forming part, 131 ... photoconductor, 131a ... outer peripheral surface, 132 ... charging part, 133 ... exposure part, 134 ... transfer part, 134a ... outer peripheral surface, 135 ... transfer nip, 136 ... transfer section, 14 ... surface texture processing section, 15 ... ink receiving layer solidifying section, 151 ... solidifying roller, 152 ... heater, 16 ... conveying section, 161 ... conveying belt, 162 ... Conveying roller, 163 ... Conveying roller, 17 ... Tray, 18 ... Carrier, 181 ... Core, 182 ... Dielectric layer, 19 ... Layer forming roller, 2 ... marking part forming part, 90 ... recording medium, 90 '... recording medium, 901 ... base material, 902 ... ink receiving layer, 902a ... surface, 903 ... margin part, 904 ... marking part, 905 ... first surface, 906 ... Second surface, CD131 ... conveying direction, CD16 ... conveying direction, F6 ... grinding force, F72 ... first clamping force, F73 ... second clamping force, F121 ... suction force, LB133 ... laser light, S101 to S104 ... step, V31 ... speed, V6 ... third speed, V72 ... first speed, V73 ... second speed, V131 ... speed, V16 ... speed, W1 ... weight, W2 ... weight, α6 ... arrow, α8 ... arrow, α19 ... arrow, α22 ... Arrow, α23 ... Arrow, α24 ... Arrow, α31 ... Arrow, α32 ... Arrow, α34 ... Arrow, α41 ... Arrow, α72 ... Arrow, α73 ... Arrow, α121 ... Arrow, α122 ... Arrow, α125 ... Arrow , Α131 ... arrow, α132 ... arrow, α134 ... arrow, α151 ... arrow, α162 ... arrow, α163 ... arrow, α18 ... arrow, β31 ... arrow, β32 ... arrow, β41 ... arrow, β134 ... arrow, β151 ... arrow, β162 ... arrows.

Claims (17)

  1. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、
    　基材を搬送する搬送部と、
    　前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、
    　前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは平行（同方向）であることを特徴とする記録媒体製造装置。     A carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material;
    A transport unit for transporting the substrate;
    A transfer portion for transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the base material,
    In the transfer unit, the transport direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier and the transport direction of the base material by the transport unit are parallel (in the same direction).
  2. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ、第１速度Ｖ１で搬送する担持体と、
    　基材を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送する搬送部と、
    　前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、
    　前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは、平行（同じ）であり、
    　Ｖ１＞Ｖ２なる関係を満足することを特徴とする記録媒体製造装置。     A carrier that carries a fiber-containing material including cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material, and that conveys the fiber-containing material at a first speed V1,
    A transport unit for transporting the substrate at the second speed V2,
    A transfer portion for transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the base material,
    In the transfer unit, the transport direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier and the transport direction of the base material by the transport unit are parallel (same),
    A recording medium manufacturing apparatus satisfying a relationship of V1> V2.
  3. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、
    　基材を搬送する搬送部と、
    　前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、
    　前記転写部では、前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送方向と、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送方向とは反対方向であることを特徴とする記録媒体製造装置。     A carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material;
    A transport unit for transporting the substrate;
    A transfer portion for transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the base material,
    In the transfer unit, the transport direction of the fiber-containing material by the carrier is opposite to the transport direction of the base material by the transport unit.
  4. 　前記担持体による前記繊維含有材料の搬送速度を第１速度Ｖ１、前記搬送部による前記基材の搬送速度を第２速度Ｖ２としたとき、
    　｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足する請求項３に記載の記録媒体製造装置。     When the transport speed of the fiber-containing material by the carrier is a first speed V1, and the transport speed of the substrate by the transport section is a second speed V2,
    The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 3, wherein a relationship | V1 |> | V2 | is satisfied.
  5. 　｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＞１．２なる関係を満足する請求項１ないし４のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a relation of | V1 | / | V2 |> 1.2 is satisfied.
  6. 　｜Ｖ１｜／｜Ｖ２｜＜１５なる関係を満足する請求項１ないし５のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein a relationship of | V1 | / | V2 | <15 is satisfied.
  7. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持しつつ搬送する担持体と、
    　基材を搬送する搬送部と、
    　前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から前記基材に転写する転写部と、を備え、
    　前記担持体に担持されている前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、前記基材に転写された前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、
    　Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足することを特徴とする記録媒体製造装置。     A carrier that conveys a fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material;
    A transport unit for transporting the substrate;
    A transfer portion for transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to the base material,
    When the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material carried on the carrier is W1, and the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate is W2,
    A recording medium manufacturing apparatus satisfying a relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0.
  8. 　Ｗ２／Ｗ１＜１５なる関係を満足する請求項７に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 7, wherein a relationship of W2 / W1 <15 is satisfied.
  9. 　前記担持体は、回転体である請求項１ないし８のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the carrier is a rotating body.
  10. 　前記回転体は、外周部に誘電体層を有する請求項９に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the rotating body has a dielectric layer on an outer peripheral portion.
  11. 　前記転写部は、静電気力によって前記繊維含有材料を転写するものである請求項１ないし１０のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material by electrostatic force.
  12. 　前記転写部は、前記担持体との間で前記基材を挟持して、前記繊維含有材料の転写を行なう請求項１１に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 12. The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material by sandwiching the base material with the carrier.
  13. 　前記転写部は、前記基材上で前記担持体を、前記基材に転写される前記繊維含有材料の層の厚さよりも大きく離間させて、前記繊維含有材料の転写を行なう請求項１１に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 12. The transfer unit according to claim 11, wherein the transfer unit transfers the fiber-containing material by separating the carrier from the thickness of the layer of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate. Recording medium manufacturing apparatus.
  14. 　前記セルロース繊維の平均アスペクト比は、３未満である請求項１ないし１３のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein an average aspect ratio of the cellulose fibers is less than 3.
  15. 　前記セルロース繊維の平均長さは、１μｍ以上１００μｍ以下である請求項１ないし１４のいずれか１項に記載の記録媒体製造装置。 The recording medium manufacturing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein an average length of the cellulose fibers is 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less.
  16. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を第１速度Ｖ１で搬送するとともに、基材を第２速度Ｖ２で搬送して、前記繊維含有材料を前記基材に転写するステップを有し、
    　前記ステップでは、｜Ｖ１｜＞｜Ｖ２｜なる関係を満足することを特徴とする記録媒体の製造方法。     Transferring the fiber-containing material containing cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material at a first speed V1, transferring the substrate at a second speed V2, and transferring the fiber-containing material to the substrate;
    In the step, the relationship | V1 |> | V2 | is satisfied.
  17. 　セルロース繊維と疎水性材料とを含む繊維含有材料を担持体で担持して、前記繊維含有材料を前記担持体から基材に転写する転写ステップを有し、
    　前記担持体に担持されている前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ１、前記基材に転写された前記繊維含有材料の単位面積当たりの重量をＷ２としたとき、
    　Ｗ２／Ｗ１＞１．０なる関係を満足することを特徴とする記録媒体の製造方法。     Carrying a fiber-containing material comprising cellulose fibers and a hydrophobic material on a carrier, and transferring the fiber-containing material from the carrier to a substrate;
    When the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material carried on the carrier is W1, and the weight per unit area of the fiber-containing material transferred to the substrate is W2,
    A method of manufacturing a recording medium, characterized by satisfying a relationship of W2 / W1> 1.0.
PCT/JP2017/030387 2016-08-29 2017-08-24 Recording medium production apparatus and recording medium production method WO2018043294A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016-166553 2016-08-29
JP2016166554 2016-08-29
JP2016-166552 2016-08-29
JP2016-166554 2016-08-29
JP2016166553A JP2018034309A (en) 2016-08-29 2016-08-29 Method for regenerating recording medium and apparatus for generating recording medium
JP2016166552A JP6844150B2 (en) 2016-08-29 2016-08-29 Recording medium manufacturing method, recording medium manufacturing device, recording medium playback method, and recording medium playback device
JP2017-150473 2017-08-03
JP2017150473A JP2018034506A (en) 2016-08-29 2017-08-03 Apparatus for manufacturing recording medium and method for manufacturing recording medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018043294A1 true WO2018043294A1 (en) 2018-03-08

Family

ID=61301792

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/030387 WO2018043294A1 (en) 2016-08-29 2017-08-24 Recording medium production apparatus and recording medium production method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018043294A1 (en)

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0532076A (en) * 1991-07-26 1993-02-09 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Acceptor layer transfer sheet and thermal transfer image receiving sheet
JPH0699673A (en) * 1991-01-17 1994-04-12 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Image receiving layer transfer sheet
JPH08112974A (en) * 1994-08-24 1996-05-07 Bando Chem Ind Ltd Manufacture of thermal transfer image receiving sheet
JPH09164760A (en) * 1995-12-18 1997-06-24 Daicel Chem Ind Ltd Recording sheet
JPH1016382A (en) * 1996-04-30 1998-01-20 Canon Inc Transfer medium for ink-jet recording, transferring method using it and cloth to be transferred
JPH11180052A (en) * 1997-12-19 1999-07-06 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Receiving layer transfer sheet, and image forming method
JP2001105747A (en) * 1999-10-14 2001-04-17 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Heat-transfer dye image-receiving sheet and accepting layer transfer sheet
JP2003275664A (en) * 2002-03-26 2003-09-30 Konica Corp Coating method, coated product, and ink-jet recording medium
JP2009154323A (en) * 2007-12-25 2009-07-16 Canon Inc Inkjet recording medium and its manufacturing method
WO2011001706A1 (en) * 2009-06-29 2011-01-06 日本製紙株式会社 Paper for recording of information and processed paper
WO2017145821A1 (en) * 2016-02-26 2017-08-31 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Recording medium

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0699673A (en) * 1991-01-17 1994-04-12 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Image receiving layer transfer sheet
JPH0532076A (en) * 1991-07-26 1993-02-09 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Acceptor layer transfer sheet and thermal transfer image receiving sheet
JPH08112974A (en) * 1994-08-24 1996-05-07 Bando Chem Ind Ltd Manufacture of thermal transfer image receiving sheet
JPH09164760A (en) * 1995-12-18 1997-06-24 Daicel Chem Ind Ltd Recording sheet
JPH1016382A (en) * 1996-04-30 1998-01-20 Canon Inc Transfer medium for ink-jet recording, transferring method using it and cloth to be transferred
JPH11180052A (en) * 1997-12-19 1999-07-06 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Receiving layer transfer sheet, and image forming method
JP2001105747A (en) * 1999-10-14 2001-04-17 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Heat-transfer dye image-receiving sheet and accepting layer transfer sheet
JP2003275664A (en) * 2002-03-26 2003-09-30 Konica Corp Coating method, coated product, and ink-jet recording medium
JP2009154323A (en) * 2007-12-25 2009-07-16 Canon Inc Inkjet recording medium and its manufacturing method
WO2011001706A1 (en) * 2009-06-29 2011-01-06 日本製紙株式会社 Paper for recording of information and processed paper
WO2017145821A1 (en) * 2016-02-26 2017-08-31 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Recording medium

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HERBERT L. WEISS, COATING & LAMINATING MACHINE , 7 ROLL COATER, 29 February 1996 (1996-02-29), pages 7.1 - 7-4, 7.8 to 7.9 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2017145821A1 (en) Recording medium
JP4765810B2 (en) Label production method and apparatus
JP4841466B2 (en) Image forming apparatus
WO2005094470A2 (en) Electrophotographic toner regulating member with polymer coating having surface roughness modified by fine particles
JP2018034309A (en) Method for regenerating recording medium and apparatus for generating recording medium
CN102004412A (en) Developing device and image forming apparatus including the same
WO2018043294A1 (en) Recording medium production apparatus and recording medium production method
JP6844150B2 (en) Recording medium manufacturing method, recording medium manufacturing device, recording medium playback method, and recording medium playback device
JP2018034506A (en) Apparatus for manufacturing recording medium and method for manufacturing recording medium
WO2017090527A1 (en) Sheet manufacturing device
CN101765814A (en) Peeling member, member for forming peeling member, method of manufacturing peeling member, image remover, image forming and removing system, and image removing method
JP6844239B2 (en) Recording medium manufacturing equipment
JP2017149886A (en) Composite, cartridge, and method for producing composite
WO2018110343A1 (en) Recording medium production device
WO2018110656A1 (en) Recording medium production device
JP2018094828A (en) Recording medium production method and recording medium production device
JP6690297B2 (en) Reusable recording medium manufacturing method, recording medium manufacturing apparatus, and recording medium processing apparatus
JP2018094832A (en) Recording medium production device
JP7283047B2 (en) Image forming method
JP7215066B2 (en) Image forming method
JP5849273B2 (en) Storage unit, toner passage, and image forming apparatus
JP2017149093A (en) Recording medium
US20200102703A1 (en) Recording medium manufacturing apparatus
JP2018096022A (en) Recording medium manufacturing installation
WO2017154535A1 (en) Recording medium processing device and recording medium processing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17846299

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17846299

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1